<!--
Documentation of the system catalogs, directed toward PostgreSQL developers
- $PostgreSQL: pgsql/doc/src/sgml/catalogs.sgml,v 2.87 2004/06/16 01:26:33 tgl Exp $
+ $PostgreSQL: pgsql/doc/src/sgml/catalogs.sgml,v 2.88 2004/06/18 06:13:02 tgl Exp $
-->
<chapter id="catalogs">
<entry>planner statistics</entry>
</row>
+ <row>
+ <entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-tablespace"><structname>pg_tablespace</structname></link></entry>
+ <entry>tablespaces within this database cluster</entry>
+ </row>
+
<row>
<entry><link linkend="catalog-pg-trigger"><structname>pg_trigger</structname></link></entry>
<entry>triggers</entry>
<entry>Name of the on-disk file of this relation; 0 if none</entry>
</row>
+ <row>
+ <entry><structfield>reltablespace</structfield></entry>
+ <entry><type>oid</type></entry>
+ <entry><literal><link linkend="catalog-pg-tablespace"><structname>pg_tablespace</structname></link>.oid</literal></entry>
+ <entry>
+ The tablespace in which this relation is stored. If zero,
+ the database's default tablespace is implied. (Not meaningful
+ if the relation has no on-disk file.)
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
<row>
<entry><structfield>relpages</structfield></entry>
<entry><type>int4</type></entry>
</row>
<row>
- <entry><structfield>datpath</structfield></entry>
- <entry><type>text</type></entry>
- <entry></entry>
+ <entry><structfield>dattablespace</structfield></entry>
+ <entry><type>oid</type></entry>
+ <entry><literal><link linkend="catalog-pg-tablespace"><structname>pg_tablespace</structname></link>.oid</literal></entry>
<entry>
- If the database is stored at an alternative location then this
- records the location. It's either an environment variable name
- or an absolute path, depending how it was entered.
+ The default tablespace for the database.
+ Within this database, all tables for which
+ <structname>pg_class</>.<structfield>reltablespace</> is zero
+ will be stored in this tablespace; in particular, all the non-shared
+ system catalogs will be there.
</entry>
</row>
<entry>Owner of the namespace</entry>
</row>
+ <row>
+ <entry><structfield>nsptablespace</structfield></entry>
+ <entry><type>oid</type></entry>
+ <entry><literal><link linkend="catalog-pg-tablespace"><structname>pg_tablespace</structname></link>.oid</literal></entry>
+ <entry>
+ The default tablespace in which to place relations created in this
+ namespace. If zero, the database's default tablespace is implied.
+ (Changing this does not affect pre-existing relations.)
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
<row>
<entry><structfield>nspacl</structfield></entry>
<entry><type>aclitem[]</type></entry>
</sect1>
+ <sect1 id="catalog-pg-tablespace">
+ <title><structname>pg_tablespace</structname></title>
+
+ <indexterm zone="catalog-pg-tablespace">
+ <primary>pg_tablespace</primary>
+ </indexterm>
+
+ <para>
+ The catalog <structname>pg_tablespace</structname> stores information
+ about the available tablespaces. Tables can be placed in particular
+ tablespaces to aid administration of disk layout.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>
+ Unlike most system catalogs, <structname>pg_tablespace</structname>
+ is shared across all databases of a cluster: there is only one
+ copy of <structname>pg_tablespace</structname> per cluster, not
+ one per database.
+ </para>
+
+ <table>
+ <title><structname>pg_tablespace</> Columns</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols=4>
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>Name</entry>
+ <entry>Type</entry>
+ <entry>References</entry>
+ <entry>Description</entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry><structfield>spcname</structfield></entry>
+ <entry><type>name</type></entry>
+ <entry></entry>
+ <entry>Tablespace name</entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry><structfield>spcowner</structfield></entry>
+ <entry><type>int4</type></entry>
+ <entry><literal><link linkend="catalog-pg-shadow"><structname>pg_shadow</structname></link>.usesysid</literal></entry>
+ <entry>Owner of the tablespace, usually the user who created it</entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry><structfield>spclocation</structfield></entry>
+ <entry><type>text</type></entry>
+ <entry></entry>
+ <entry>Location (directory path) of the tablespace</entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry><structfield>spcacl</structfield></entry>
+ <entry><type>aclitem[]</type></entry>
+ <entry></entry>
+ <entry>Access privileges</entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect1>
+
+
<sect1 id="catalog-pg-trigger">
<title><structname>pg_trigger</structname></title>
<!--
-$PostgreSQL: pgsql/doc/src/sgml/manage-ag.sgml,v 2.29 2003/11/29 19:51:37 pgsql Exp $
+$PostgreSQL: pgsql/doc/src/sgml/manage-ag.sgml,v 2.30 2004/06/18 06:13:02 tgl Exp $
-->
<chapter id="managing-databases">
<sect1 id="manage-ag-alternate-locs">
<title>Alternative Locations</title>
+ <para>
+ XXX this is entirely dead now, and needs to be replaced by a DBA-level
+ description of tablespaces.
+ </para>
+
<para>
It is possible to create a database in a location other than the
default location for the installation. But remember that all database access
Databases created in alternative locations can be
accessed and dropped like any other database.
</para>
-
- <note>
- <para>
- It can also be possible to specify absolute paths directly to the
- <command>CREATE DATABASE</> command without defining environment
- variables. This is disallowed by default because it is a security
- risk. To allow it, you must compile <productname>PostgreSQL</> with
- the C preprocessor macro <literal>ALLOW_ABSOLUTE_DBPATHS</>
- defined. One way to do this is to run the compilation step like
- this:
-<programlisting>
-gmake CPPFLAGS=-DALLOW_ABSOLUTE_DBPATHS all
-</programlisting>
- </para>
- </note>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="manage-ag-dropdb">
<!--
-$PostgreSQL: pgsql/doc/src/sgml/ref/allfiles.sgml,v 1.56 2004/04/20 01:11:49 momjian Exp $
+$PostgreSQL: pgsql/doc/src/sgml/ref/allfiles.sgml,v 1.57 2004/06/18 06:13:05 tgl Exp $
PostgreSQL documentation
Complete list of usable sgml source files in this directory.
-->
<!entity createSequence system "create_sequence.sgml">
<!entity createTable system "create_table.sgml">
<!entity createTableAs system "create_table_as.sgml">
+<!entity createTableSpace system "create_tablespace.sgml">
<!entity createTrigger system "create_trigger.sgml">
<!entity createType system "create_type.sgml">
<!entity createUser system "create_user.sgml">
<!entity dropSchema system "drop_schema.sgml">
<!entity dropSequence system "drop_sequence.sgml">
<!entity dropTable system "drop_table.sgml">
+<!entity dropTableSpace system "drop_tablespace.sgml">
<!entity dropTrigger system "drop_trigger.sgml">
<!entity dropType system "drop_type.sgml">
<!entity dropUser system "drop_user.sgml">
<!--
-$PostgreSQL: pgsql/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_database.sgml,v 1.38 2004/03/23 02:47:35 neilc Exp $
+$PostgreSQL: pgsql/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_database.sgml,v 1.39 2004/06/18 06:13:05 tgl Exp $
PostgreSQL documentation
-->
<synopsis>
CREATE DATABASE <replaceable class="PARAMETER">name</replaceable>
[ [ WITH ] [ OWNER [=] <replaceable class="parameter">dbowner</replaceable> ]
- [ LOCATION [=] '<replaceable class="parameter">dbpath</replaceable>' ]
[ TEMPLATE [=] <replaceable class="parameter">template</replaceable> ]
- [ ENCODING [=] <replaceable class="parameter">encoding</replaceable> ] ]
+ [ ENCODING [=] <replaceable class="parameter">encoding</replaceable> ]
+ [ TABLESPACE [=] <replaceable class="parameter">tablespace</replaceable> ] ]
</synopsis>
</refsynopsisdiv>
privilege can only create databases owned by themselves.
</para>
- <para>
- An alternative location can be specified in order to,
- for example, store the database on a different disk.
- The path must have been prepared with the
- <xref linkend="APP-INITLOCATION" endterm="APP-INITLOCATION-title">
- command.
- </para>
-
- <para>
- If the path name does not contain a slash, it is interpreted
- as an environment variable name, which must be known to the
- server process. This way the database administrator can
- exercise control over locations in which databases can be created.
- (A customary choice is, e.g., <envar>PGDATA2</envar>.)
- If the server is compiled with <literal>ALLOW_ABSOLUTE_DBPATHS</literal>
- (not so by default), absolute path names, as identified by
- a leading slash
- (e.g., <filename>/usr/local/pgsql/data</filename>),
- are allowed as well.
- In either case, the final path name must be absolute and must not
- contain any single quotes.
- </para>
-
<para>
By default, the new database will be created by cloning the standard
system database <literal>template1</>. A different template can be
version of <productname>PostgreSQL</productname>. This is useful
if you wish to avoid copying
any installation-local objects that may have been added to
- <literal>template1</>.
- </para>
-
- <para>
- The optional encoding parameter allows selection of the database
- encoding. When not specified, it defaults to the encoding used by
- the selected template database.
+ <literal>template1</>.
</para>
</refsect1>
<term><replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable></term>
<listitem>
<para>
- The name of a database to create.
+ The name of a database to create.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<listitem>
<para>
The name of the database user who will own the new database,
- or <literal>DEFAULT</literal> to use the default (namely, the
- user executing the command).
+ or <literal>DEFAULT</literal> to use the default (namely, the
+ user executing the command).
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
- <term><replaceable class="parameter">dbpath</replaceable></term>
+ <term><replaceable class="parameter">template</replaceable></term>
<listitem>
<para>
- An alternate file-system location in which to store the new database,
- specified as a string literal;
- or <literal>DEFAULT</literal> to use the default location.
+ The name of the template from which to create the new database,
+ or <literal>DEFAULT</literal> to use the default template
+ (<literal>template1</literal>).
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
- <term><replaceable class="parameter">template</replaceable></term>
+ <term><replaceable class="parameter">encoding</replaceable></term>
<listitem>
<para>
- The name of the template from which to create the new database,
- or <literal>DEFAULT</literal> to use the default template
- (<literal>template1</literal>).
+ Character set encoding to use in the new database. Specify
+ a string constant (e.g., <literal>'SQL_ASCII'</literal>),
+ or an integer encoding number, or <literal>DEFAULT</literal>
+ to use the default encoding. The character sets supported by the
+ <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> server are described in
+ <xref linkend="multibyte-charset-supported">.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
- <term><replaceable class="parameter">encoding</replaceable></term>
+ <term><replaceable class="parameter">tablespace</replaceable></term>
<listitem>
<para>
- Character set encoding to use in the new database. Specify
- a string constant (e.g., <literal>'SQL_ASCII'</literal>),
- or an integer encoding number, or <literal>DEFAULT</literal>
- to use the default encoding. The character sets supported by the
- <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> server are described in
- <xref linkend="multibyte-charset-supported">.
+ Specifies the default tablespace for the new database.
+ If not specified, the same tablespace that is default for
+ the template database is used. See
+ <xref linkend="sql-createtablespace" endterm="sql-createtablespace-title">
+ for more information.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<para>
Errors along the line of <quote>could not initialize database directory</>
are most likely related to insufficient permissions on the data
- directory, a full disk, or other file system problems. When using an
- alternate location, the user under
- which the database server is running must have access to the location.
+ directory, a full disk, or other file system problems.
</para>
<para>
wrapper program around this command, provided for convenience.
</para>
- <para>
- There are security issues involved with using alternate database
- locations specified with absolute path names; this is why the feature
- is not enabled by default. See <xref
- linkend="manage-ag-alternate-locs"> for more information.
- </para>
-
<para>
Although it is possible to copy a database other than <literal>template1</>
by specifying its name as the template, this is not (yet) intended as
<programlisting>
CREATE DATABASE lusiadas;
-</programlisting>
- </para>
-
- <para>
- To create a new database in an alternate area
- <filename>~/private_db</filename>, execute the following from the
- shell:
-
-<programlisting>
-mkdir private_db
-initlocation ~/private_db
-</programlisting>
-
- Then execute the following from within a
- <application>psql</application> session:
-
-<programlisting>
-CREATE DATABASE elsewhere WITH LOCATION '/home/olly/private_db';
</programlisting>
</para>
</refsect1>
<!--
-$PostgreSQL: pgsql/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_index.sgml,v 1.47 2004/04/20 12:53:28 momjian Exp $
+$PostgreSQL: pgsql/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_index.sgml,v 1.48 2004/06/18 06:13:05 tgl Exp $
PostgreSQL documentation
-->
<synopsis>
CREATE [ UNIQUE ] INDEX <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> ON <replaceable class="parameter">table</replaceable> [ USING <replaceable class="parameter">method</replaceable> ]
( { <replaceable class="parameter">column</replaceable> | ( <replaceable class="parameter">expression</replaceable> ) } [ <replaceable class="parameter">opclass</replaceable> ] [, ...] )
+ [ TABLESPACE <replaceable class="parameter">tablespace</replaceable> ]
[ WHERE <replaceable class="parameter">predicate</replaceable> ]
</synopsis>
</refsynopsisdiv>
<para>
Indexes are not used for <literal>IS NULL</> clauses by default.
- The best way to use indexes in such cases is to create a partial index
+ The best way to use indexes in such cases is to create a partial index
using an <literal>IS NULL</> comparison.
</para>
<term><literal>UNIQUE</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>
- Causes the system to check for
- duplicate values in the table when the index is created (if data
- already exist) and each time data is added. Attempts to
- insert or update data which would result in duplicate entries
- will generate an error.
+ Causes the system to check for
+ duplicate values in the table when the index is created (if data
+ already exist) and each time data is added. Attempts to
+ insert or update data which would result in duplicate entries
+ will generate an error.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<term><replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable></term>
<listitem>
<para>
- The name of the index to be created. No schema name can be included
- here; the index is always created in the same schema as its parent
- table.
+ The name of the index to be created. No schema name can be included
+ here; the index is always created in the same schema as its parent
+ table.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<term><replaceable class="parameter">table</replaceable></term>
<listitem>
<para>
- The name (possibly schema-qualified) of the table to be indexed.
+ The name (possibly schema-qualified) of the table to be indexed.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<term><replaceable class="parameter">column</replaceable></term>
<listitem>
<para>
- The name of a column of the table.
+ The name of a column of the table.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<term><replaceable class="parameter">expression</replaceable></term>
<listitem>
<para>
- An expression based on one or more columns of the table. The
- expression usually must be written with surrounding parentheses,
- as shown in the syntax. However, the parentheses may be omitted
- if the expression has the form of a function call.
+ An expression based on one or more columns of the table. The
+ expression usually must be written with surrounding parentheses,
+ as shown in the syntax. However, the parentheses may be omitted
+ if the expression has the form of a function call.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<term><replaceable class="parameter">opclass</replaceable></term>
<listitem>
<para>
- The name of an operator class. See below for details.
+ The name of an operator class. See below for details.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><replaceable class="parameter">tablespace</replaceable></term>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>
+ The tablespace in which to create the index. If not specified,
+ the tablespace of the parent table is used.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<term><replaceable class="parameter">predicate</replaceable></term>
<listitem>
<para>
- The constraint expression for a partial index.
+ The constraint expression for a partial index.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
+
</variablelist>
</refsect1>
-->
</refsect1>
-
+
<refsect1>
<title>Compatibility</title>
<!--
-$PostgreSQL: pgsql/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_schema.sgml,v 1.11 2004/01/11 05:46:58 neilc Exp $
+$PostgreSQL: pgsql/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_schema.sgml,v 1.12 2004/06/18 06:13:05 tgl Exp $
PostgreSQL documentation
-->
<refnamediv>
<refname>CREATE SCHEMA</refname>
<refpurpose>define a new schema</refpurpose>
- </refnamediv>
+ </refnamediv>
<indexterm zone="sql-createschema">
<primary>CREATE SCHEMA</primary>
<refsynopsisdiv>
<synopsis>
-CREATE SCHEMA <replaceable class="parameter">schemaname</replaceable> [ AUTHORIZATION <replaceable class="parameter">username</replaceable> ] [ <replaceable class="parameter">schema_element</replaceable> [ ... ] ]
-CREATE SCHEMA AUTHORIZATION <replaceable class="parameter">username</replaceable> [ <replaceable class="parameter">schema_element</replaceable> [ ... ] ]
+CREATE SCHEMA <replaceable class="parameter">schemaname</replaceable> [ AUTHORIZATION <replaceable class="parameter">username</replaceable> ] [ TABLESPACE <replaceable class="parameter">tablespace</replaceable> ] [ <replaceable class="parameter">schema_element</replaceable> [ ... ] ]
+CREATE SCHEMA AUTHORIZATION <replaceable class="parameter">username</replaceable> [ TABLESPACE <replaceable class="parameter">tablespace</replaceable> ] [ <replaceable class="parameter">schema_element</replaceable> [ ... ] ]
</synopsis>
</refsynopsisdiv>
all the created objects will be owned by that user.
</para>
</refsect1>
-
+
<refsect1>
<title>Parameters</title>
<term><replaceable class="parameter">schemaname</replaceable></term>
<listitem>
<para>
- The name of a schema to be created. If this is omitted, the user name
- is used as the schema name.
+ The name of a schema to be created. If this is omitted, the user name
+ is used as the schema name.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<listitem>
<para>
The name of the user who will own the schema. If omitted,
- defaults to the user executing the command. Only superusers
- may create schemas owned by users other than themselves.
+ defaults to the user executing the command. Only superusers
+ may create schemas owned by users other than themselves.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><replaceable class="parameter">tablespace</replaceable></term>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>
+ The name of the tablespace that is to be the default tablespace
+ for all new objects created in the schema. If not supplied, the schema
+ will inherit the default tablespace of the database.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<para>
To create a schema, the invoking user must have the
- <literal>CREATE</> privilege for the current database. (Of course,
- superusers bypass this check.)
+ <literal>CREATE</> privilege for the current database.
+ Also, the <literal>TABLESPACE</> option requires having
+ <literal>CREATE</> privilege for the specified tablespace.
+ (Of course, superusers bypass these checks.)
</para>
</refsect1>
<simplelist type="inline">
<member><xref linkend="sql-alterschema" endterm="sql-alterschema-title"></member>
<member><xref linkend="sql-dropschema" endterm="sql-dropschema-title"></member>
- </simplelist>
+ <member><xref linkend="sql-createtablespace" endterm="sql-createtablespace-title"></member>
+ </simplelist>
</refsect1>
</refentry>
<!--
-$PostgreSQL: pgsql/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_sequence.sgml,v 1.39 2003/11/29 19:51:38 pgsql Exp $
+$PostgreSQL: pgsql/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_sequence.sgml,v 1.40 2004/06/18 06:13:05 tgl Exp $
PostgreSQL documentation
-->
<refnamediv>
<refname>CREATE SEQUENCE</refname>
<refpurpose>define a new sequence generator</refpurpose>
- </refnamediv>
+ </refnamediv>
<indexterm zone="sql-createsequence">
<primary>CREATE SEQUENCE</primary>
CREATE [ TEMPORARY | TEMP ] SEQUENCE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> [ INCREMENT [ BY ] <replaceable class="parameter">increment</replaceable> ]
[ MINVALUE <replaceable class="parameter">minvalue</replaceable> | NO MINVALUE ] [ MAXVALUE <replaceable class="parameter">maxvalue</replaceable> | NO MAXVALUE ]
[ START [ WITH ] <replaceable class="parameter">start</replaceable> ] [ CACHE <replaceable class="parameter">cache</replaceable> ] [ [ NO ] CYCLE ]
+ [ TABLESPACE <replaceable class="parameter">tablespace</replaceable> ]
</synopsis>
</refsynopsisdiv>
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><replaceable class="parameter">tablespace</replaceable></term>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>
+ The optional clause <literal>TABLESPACE</> <replaceable
+ class="parameter">tablespace</replaceable> specifies
+ the tablespace in which to create the sequence. If this clause
+ is not supplied, the tablespace of the sequence's schema will be used.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
</variablelist>
</refsect1>
Select the next number from this sequence:
<programlisting>
SELECT nextval('serial');
-
+
nextval
---------
114
<!--
-$PostgreSQL: pgsql/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_table.sgml,v 1.81 2004/05/19 23:10:43 momjian Exp $
+$PostgreSQL: pgsql/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_table.sgml,v 1.82 2004/06/18 06:13:05 tgl Exp $
PostgreSQL documentation
-->
[ INHERITS ( <replaceable>parent_table</replaceable> [, ... ] ) ]
[ WITH OIDS | WITHOUT OIDS ]
[ ON COMMIT { PRESERVE ROWS | DELETE ROWS | DROP } ]
+[ TABLESPACE <replaceable class="PARAMETER">tablespace</replaceable> ]
where <replaceable class="PARAMETER">column_constraint</replaceable> is:
[ MATCH FULL | MATCH PARTIAL | MATCH SIMPLE ] [ ON DELETE <replaceable class="parameter">action</replaceable> ] [ ON UPDATE <replaceable class="parameter">action</replaceable> ] }
[ DEFERRABLE | NOT DEFERRABLE ] [ INITIALLY DEFERRED | INITIALLY IMMEDIATE ]
</synopsis>
-
+
</refsynopsisdiv>
<refsect1 id="SQL-CREATETABLE-description">
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
-
+
<varlistentry>
<term><literal>UNIQUE</> (column constraint)</term>
<term><literal>UNIQUE ( <replaceable class="PARAMETER">column_name</replaceable> [, ... ] )</> (table constraint)</term>
<term><literal>REFERENCES <replaceable class="parameter">reftable</replaceable> [ ( <replaceable class="parameter">refcolumn</replaceable> ) ] [ MATCH <replaceable class="parameter">matchtype</replaceable> ] [ ON DELETE <replaceable class="parameter">action</replaceable> ] [ ON UPDATE <replaceable class="parameter">action</replaceable> ]</literal> (column constraint)</term>
<term><literal>FOREIGN KEY ( <replaceable class="parameter">column</replaceable> [, ... ] )
- REFERENCES <replaceable class="parameter">reftable</replaceable> [ ( <replaceable class="parameter">refcolumn</replaceable> [, ... ] ) ]
+ REFERENCES <replaceable class="parameter">reftable</replaceable> [ ( <replaceable class="parameter">refcolumn</replaceable> [, ... ] ) ]
[ MATCH <replaceable class="parameter">matchtype</replaceable> ]
- [ ON DELETE <replaceable class="parameter">action</replaceable> ]
+ [ ON DELETE <replaceable class="parameter">action</replaceable> ]
[ ON UPDATE <replaceable class="parameter">action</replaceable> ]</literal>
(table constraint)</term>
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
-
+
<varlistentry>
<term><literal>DEFERRABLE</literal></term>
<term><literal>NOT DEFERRABLE</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>
The behavior of temporary tables at the end of a transaction
- block can be controlled using <literal>ON COMMIT</literal>.
+ block can be controlled using <literal>ON COMMIT</literal>.
The three options are:
<variablelist>
<term><literal>PRESERVE ROWS</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>
- No special action is taken at the ends of transactions.
- This is the default behavior.
+ No special action is taken at the ends of transactions.
+ This is the default behavior.
</para>
- </listitem>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
-
+
<varlistentry>
<term><literal>DELETE ROWS</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>
All rows in the temporary table will be deleted at the
end of each transaction block. Essentially, an automatic
- <xref linkend="sql-truncate"> is done at each commit.
+ <xref linkend="sql-truncate"> is done at each commit.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<listitem>
<para>
The temporary table will be dropped at the end of the current
- transaction block.
+ transaction block.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><literal>TABLESPACE <replaceable class="PARAMETER">tablespace</replaceable></literal></term>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>
+ The <replaceable class="PARAMETER">tablespace</replaceable> is the name
+ of the tablespace in which the new table is to be created. If not
+ supplied, the default tablespace of the table's schema will be used.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
</variablelist>
- </refsect1>
+ </refsect1>
<refsect1 id="SQL-CREATETABLE-notes">
<title>Notes</title>
);
</programlisting>
</para>
-
+
<para>
Define a check column constraint:
);
</programlisting>
</para>
-
+
<para>
Define a primary key table constraint for the table
<structname>films</>. Primary key table constraints can be defined
did integer,
name varchar(40),
PRIMARY KEY(did)
-);
+);
</programlisting>
<programlisting>
</para>
</refsect1>
-
+
<refsect1 id="SQL-CREATETABLE-compatibility">
<title id="SQL-CREATETABLE-compatibility-title">Compatibility</title>
<para>
Although the syntax of <literal>CREATE TEMPORARY TABLE</literal>
resembles that of the SQL standard, the effect is not the same. In the
- standard,
+ standard,
temporary tables are defined just once and automatically exist (starting
with empty contents) in every session that needs them.
<productname>PostgreSQL</productname> instead
column, its presence is simply noise.
</para>
</refsect2>
-
+
<refsect2>
<title>Inheritance</title>
DROP COLUMN</>, so it seems cleaner to ignore this spec restriction.
</para>
</refsect2>
+
+ <refsect2>
+ <title>TABLESPACE</title>
+
+ <para>
+ The <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> concept of tablespaces is not
+ standard.
+ </para>
+ </refsect2>
</refsect1>
<simplelist type="inline">
<member><xref linkend="sql-altertable" endterm="sql-altertable-title"></member>
<member><xref linkend="sql-droptable" endterm="sql-droptable-title"></member>
+ <member><xref linkend="sql-createtablespace" endterm="sql-createtablespace-title"></member>
</simplelist>
</refsect1>
</refentry>
--- /dev/null
+<!--
+$PostgreSQL: pgsql/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_tablespace.sgml,v 1.1 2004/06/18 06:13:05 tgl Exp $
+PostgreSQL documentation
+-->
+
+<refentry id="SQL-CREATETABLESPACE">
+ <refmeta>
+ <refentrytitle id="sql-createtablespace-title">CREATE TABLESPACE</refentrytitle>
+ <refmiscinfo>SQL - Language Statements</refmiscinfo>
+ </refmeta>
+
+ <refnamediv>
+ <refname>CREATE TABLESPACE</refname>
+ <refpurpose>define a new tablespace</refpurpose>
+ </refnamediv>
+
+ <indexterm zone="sql-createtablespace">
+ <primary>CREATE TABLESPACE</primary>
+ </indexterm>
+
+ <refsynopsisdiv>
+<synopsis>
+CREATE TABLESPACE <replaceable class="parameter">tablespacename</replaceable> [ OWNER <replaceable class="parameter">username</replaceable> ] LOCATION '<replaceable class="parameter">directory</replaceable>'
+</synopsis>
+ </refsynopsisdiv>
+
+ <refsect1>
+ <title>Description</title>
+
+ <para>
+ <command>CREATE TABLESPACE</command> registers a new cluster-wide
+ tablespace. The tablespace name must be distinct from the name of any
+ existing tablespace in the database cluster.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>
+ A tablespace allows superusers to define an alternative location on the
+ file system where the data files representing database objects
+ (such as tables and indexes) may reside.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>
+ A user with appropriate privileges can pass
+ <replaceable class="parameter">tablespacename</> to <command>CREATE
+ DATABASE</>, <command>CREATE SCHEMA</>, <command>CREATE TABLE</>,
+ <command>CREATE INDEX</> or <command>CREATE SEQUENCE</> to have the data
+ files for these objects stored within the specified tablespace.
+ </para>
+ </refsect1>
+
+ <refsect1>
+ <title>Parameters</title>
+
+ <variablelist>
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><replaceable class="parameter">tablespacename</replaceable></term>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>
+ The name of a tablespace to be created.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><replaceable class="parameter">username</replaceable></term>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>
+ The name of the user who will own the tablespace. If omitted,
+ defaults to the user executing the command. Only superusers
+ may create tablespaces, but they can assign ownership of tablespaces
+ to non-superusers.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><replaceable class="parameter">directory</replaceable></term>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>
+ The directory that will be used for the tablespace. The directory
+ must be empty and must be owned by the
+ <productname>PostgreSQL</> system user. The directory must be
+ specified by an absolute path name.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ </variablelist>
+ </refsect1>
+
+ <refsect1>
+ <title>Notes</title>
+
+ <para>
+ Tablespaces are only supported on systems that support symbolic links.
+ </para>
+ </refsect1>
+
+ <refsect1>
+ <title>Examples</title>
+
+ <para>
+ Create a tablespace <literal>dbspace</> at <literal>/data/dbs</>:
+<programlisting>
+CREATE TABLESPACE dbspace LOCATION '/data/dbs';
+</programlisting>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>
+ Create a tablespace <literal>indexspace</> at <literal>/data/indexes</>
+ owned by user <literal>genevieve</>:
+<programlisting>
+CREATE TABLESPACE indexspace OWNER genevieve LOCATION '/data/indexes';
+</programlisting>
+ </para>
+ </refsect1>
+
+ <refsect1>
+ <title>Compatibility</title>
+
+ <para>
+ <command>CREATE TABLESPACE</command> is a <productname>PostgreSQL</>
+ extension.
+ </para>
+ </refsect1>
+
+ <refsect1>
+ <title>See Also</title>
+
+ <simplelist type="inline">
+ <member><xref linkend="sql-createdatabase" endterm="sql-createdatabase-title"></member>
+ <member><xref linkend="sql-createschema" endterm="sql-createschema-title"></member>
+ <member><xref linkend="sql-createtable" endterm="sql-createtable-title"></member>
+ <member><xref linkend="sql-createindex" endterm="sql-createindex-title"></member>
+ <member><xref linkend="sql-createsequence" endterm="sql-createsequence-title"></member>
+ <member><xref linkend="sql-droptablespace" endterm="sql-droptablespace-title"></member>
+ </simplelist>
+ </refsect1>
+
+</refentry>
+
+<!-- Keep this comment at the end of the file
+Local variables:
+mode: sgml
+sgml-omittag:nil
+sgml-shorttag:t
+sgml-minimize-attributes:nil
+sgml-always-quote-attributes:t
+sgml-indent-step:1
+sgml-indent-data:t
+sgml-parent-document:nil
+sgml-default-dtd-file:"../reference.ced"
+sgml-exposed-tags:nil
+sgml-local-catalogs:"/usr/lib/sgml/catalog"
+sgml-local-ecat-files:nil
+End:
+-->
--- /dev/null
+<!--
+$PostgreSQL: pgsql/doc/src/sgml/ref/drop_tablespace.sgml,v 1.1 2004/06/18 06:13:05 tgl Exp $
+PostgreSQL documentation
+-->
+
+<refentry id="SQL-DROPTABLESPACE">
+ <refmeta>
+ <refentrytitle id="SQL-DROPTABLESPACE-TITLE">DROP TABLESPACE</refentrytitle>
+ <refmiscinfo>SQL - Language Statements</refmiscinfo>
+ </refmeta>
+
+ <refnamediv>
+ <refname>DROP TABLESPACE</refname>
+ <refpurpose>remove a tablespace</refpurpose>
+ </refnamediv>
+
+ <indexterm zone="sql-droptablespace">
+ <primary>DROP TABLESPACE</primary>
+ </indexterm>
+
+ <refsynopsisdiv>
+<synopsis>
+DROP TABLESPACE <replaceable class="PARAMETER">tablespacename</replaceable>
+</synopsis>
+ </refsynopsisdiv>
+
+ <refsect1>
+ <title>Description</title>
+
+ <para>
+ <command>DROP TABLESPACE</command> removes a tablespace from the system.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>
+ A tablespace can only be dropped by its owner or a superuser.
+ The tablespace must be empty of all database objects before it can be
+ dropped. It is possible that objects in other databases may still reside
+ in the tablespace even if no objects in the current database are using
+ the tablespace.
+ </para>
+ </refsect1>
+
+ <refsect1>
+ <title>Parameters</title>
+
+ <variablelist>
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><replaceable class="PARAMETER">tablespacename</replaceable></term>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>
+ The name of a tablespace.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ </variablelist>
+ </refsect1>
+
+ <refsect1>
+ <title>Examples</title>
+
+ <para>
+ To remove tablespace <literal>mystuff</literal> from the system:
+<programlisting>
+DROP TABLESPACE mystuff;
+</programlisting>
+ </para>
+ </refsect1>
+
+ <refsect1>
+ <title>Compatibility</title>
+
+ <para>
+ <command>DROP TABLESPACE</command> is a <productname>PostgreSQL</>
+ extension.
+ </para>
+ </refsect1>
+
+ <refsect1>
+ <title>See Also</title>
+
+ <simplelist type="inline">
+ <member><xref linkend="sql-createtablespace" endterm="sql-createtablespace-title"></member>
+ </simplelist>
+ </refsect1>
+
+</refentry>
+
+<!-- Keep this comment at the end of the file
+Local variables:
+mode: sgml
+sgml-omittag:nil
+sgml-shorttag:t
+sgml-minimize-attributes:nil
+sgml-always-quote-attributes:t
+sgml-indent-step:1
+sgml-indent-data:t
+sgml-parent-document:nil
+sgml-default-dtd-file:"../reference.ced"
+sgml-exposed-tags:nil
+sgml-local-catalogs:"/usr/lib/sgml/catalog"
+sgml-local-ecat-files:nil
+End:
+-->
<!--
-$PostgreSQL: pgsql/doc/src/sgml/ref/grant.sgml,v 1.40 2004/06/01 21:49:21 tgl Exp $
+$PostgreSQL: pgsql/doc/src/sgml/ref/grant.sgml,v 1.41 2004/06/18 06:13:05 tgl Exp $
PostgreSQL documentation
-->
ON DATABASE <replaceable>dbname</replaceable> [, ...]
TO { <replaceable class="PARAMETER">username</replaceable> | GROUP <replaceable class="PARAMETER">groupname</replaceable> | PUBLIC } [, ...] [ WITH GRANT OPTION ]
+GRANT { CREATE | ALL [ PRIVILEGES ] }
+ ON TABLESPACE <replaceable>tablespacename</> [, ...]
+ TO { <replaceable class="PARAMETER">username</replaceable> | GROUP <replaceable class="PARAMETER">groupname</replaceable> | PUBLIC } [, ...] [ WITH GRANT OPTION ]
+
GRANT { EXECUTE | ALL [ PRIVILEGES ] }
ON FUNCTION <replaceable>funcname</replaceable> ([<replaceable>type</replaceable>, ...]) [, ...]
TO { <replaceable class="PARAMETER">username</replaceable> | GROUP <replaceable class="PARAMETER">groupname</replaceable> | PUBLIC } [, ...] [ WITH GRANT OPTION ]
<para>
Depending on the type of object, the initial default privileges may
include granting some privileges to <literal>PUBLIC</literal>.
- The default is no public access for tables and schemas;
+ The default is no public access for tables, schemas, and tablespaces;
<literal>TEMP</> table creation privilege for databases;
<literal>EXECUTE</> privilege for functions; and
<literal>USAGE</> privilege for languages.
<para>
For databases, allows new schemas to be created within the database.
</para>
+ <para>
+ For tablespaces, allows tables to be created within the tablespace,
+ and allows databases and schemas to be created that have the tablespace
+ as their default tablespace. (Note that revoking this privilege
+ will not alter the behavior of existing databases and schemas.)
+ </para>
<para>
For schemas, allows new objects to be created within the schema.
To rename an existing object, you must own the object <emphasis>and</>
of privilege that is applicable to procedural languages.
</para>
<para>
- For schemas, allows access to objects contained in the specified
+ For schemas, allows access to objects contained in the specified
schema (assuming that the objects' own privilege requirements are
also met). Essentially this allows the grantee to <quote>look up</>
objects within the schema.
<refsect1 id="sql-grant-compatibility">
<title>Compatibility</title>
-
+
<para>
According to the SQL standard, the <literal>PRIVILEGES</literal>
key word in <literal>ALL PRIVILEGES</literal> is required. The
<para>
The <literal>RULE</literal> privilege, and privileges on
- databases, schemas, languages, and sequences are
+ databases, tablespaces, schemas, languages, and sequences are
<productname>PostgreSQL</productname> extensions.
</para>
</refsect1>
<!--
-$PostgreSQL: pgsql/doc/src/sgml/ref/psql-ref.sgml,v 1.115 2004/04/22 17:38:14 neilc Exp $
+$PostgreSQL: pgsql/doc/src/sgml/ref/psql-ref.sgml,v 1.116 2004/06/18 06:13:05 tgl Exp $
PostgreSQL documentation
-->
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
-
+
<varlistentry>
<term><option>-c <replaceable class="parameter">command</replaceable></></term>
<term><option>--command <replaceable class="parameter">command</replaceable></></term>
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
-
+
<varlistentry>
<term><option>-l</></term>
<term><option>--list</></term>
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
-
+
<varlistentry>
<term><option>-s</></term>
<term><option>--single-step</></term>
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
-
+
<varlistentry>
<term><option>-u</></term>
<listitem>
Connect to the database as the user <replaceable
class="parameter">username</replaceable> instead of the default.
(You must have permission to do so, of course.)
- </para>
+ </para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
not belong to any option it will be interpreted as the database name
(or the user name, if the database name is also given). Not all
these options are required, defaults do apply. If you omit the host
- name, <application>psql</> will connect via a Unix domain socket
+ name, <application>psql</> will connect via a Unix domain socket
to a server on the local host, or via TCP/IP to <literal>localhost</> on machines
that don't have unix domain sockets. The default port number is compile-time determined.
Since the database server uses the same default, you will not have
</para>
<para>
- The format of a <application>psql</application> command is the backslash,
+ The format of a <application>psql</application> command is the backslash,
followed immediately by a command verb, then any arguments. The arguments
- are separated from the command verb and each other by any number of
+ are separated from the command verb and each other by any number of
whitespace characters.
</para>
<term><literal>\a</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>
- If the current table output format is unaligned, it is switched to aligned.
- If it is not unaligned, it is set to unaligned. This command is
- kept for backwards compatibility. See <command>\pset</command> for a
- general solution.
+ If the current table output format is unaligned, it is switched to aligned.
+ If it is not unaligned, it is set to unaligned. This command is
+ kept for backwards compatibility. See <command>\pset</command> for a
+ general solution.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<term><literal>\cd [ <replaceable>directory</replaceable> ]</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>
- Changes the current working directory to
- <replaceable>directory</replaceable>. Without argument, changes
- to the current user's home directory.
+ Changes the current working directory to
+ <replaceable>directory</replaceable>. Without argument, changes
+ to the current user's home directory.
</para>
- <tip>
- <para>
- To print your current working directory, use <literal>\!pwd</literal>.
- </para>
- </tip>
+ <tip>
+ To print your current working directory, use <literal>\!pwd</literal>.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<term><literal>\connect</literal> (or <literal>\c</literal>) <literal>[ <replaceable class="parameter">dbname</replaceable> [ <replaceable class="parameter">username</replaceable> ] ]</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>
- Establishes a connection to a new database and/or under a user
- name. The previous connection is closed. If <replaceable
- class="parameter">dbname</replaceable> is <literal>-</literal>
- the current database name is assumed.
- </para>
+ Establishes a connection to a new database and/or under a user
+ name. The previous connection is closed. If <replaceable
+ class="parameter">dbname</replaceable> is <literal>-</literal>
+ the current database name is assumed.
+ </para>
- <para>
- If <replaceable class="parameter">username</replaceable> is
- omitted the current user name is assumed. </para>
+ If <replaceable class="parameter">username</replaceable> is
+ omitted the current user name is assumed. </para>
- <para>
- As a special rule, <command>\connect</command> without any
- arguments will connect to the default database as the default
- user (as you would have gotten by starting
- <application>psql</application> without any arguments).
- </para>
+ As a special rule, <command>\connect</command> without any
+ arguments will connect to the default database as the default
+ user (as you would have gotten by starting
+
<application>psql</application> without any arguments).
+ </para>
- <para>
- If the connection attempt failed (wrong user name, access
- denied, etc.), the previous connection will be kept if and only
- if <application>psql</application> is in interactive mode. When
- executing a non-interactive script, processing will immediately
- stop with an error. This distinction was chosen as a user
- convenience against typos on the one hand, and a safety
- mechanism that scripts are not accidentally acting on the wrong
- database on the other hand.
- </para>
+ If the connection attempt failed (wrong user name, access
+ denied, etc.), the previous connection will be kept if and only
+
if <application>psql</application> is in interactive mode. When
+ executing a non-interactive script, processing will immediately
+ stop with an error. This distinction was chosen as a user
+ convenience against typos on the one hand, and a safety
+ mechanism that scripts are not accidentally acting on the wrong
+ database on the other hand.
+ </para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><literal>\copy <replaceable class="parameter">table</replaceable>
- [ ( <replaceable class="parameter">column_list</replaceable> ) ]
+ [ ( <replaceable class="parameter">column_list</replaceable> ) ]
{ <literal>from</literal> | <literal>to</literal> }
- { <replaceable class="parameter">filename</replaceable> | stdin | stdout | pstdin | pstdout }
- [ with ]
- [ oids ]
+ { <replaceable class="parameter">filename</replaceable> | stdin | stdout | pstdin | pstdout }
+ [ with ]
+ [ oids ]
[ delimiter [ as ] '<replaceable class="parameter">character</replaceable>' ]
[ null [ as ] '<replaceable class="parameter">string</replaceable>' ]
[ csv [ quote [ as ] '<replaceable class="parameter">character</replaceable>' ]
This means that file accessibility and privileges are those of
the local user, not the server, and no SQL superuser
privileges are required.
- </para>
-
- <para>
- The syntax of the command is similar to that of the
- <acronym>SQL</acronym> <xref linkend="sql-copy"
- endterm="sql-copy-title"> command. Note that, because of this,
- special parsing rules apply to the <command>\copy</command>
- command. In particular, the variable substitution rules and
- backslash escapes do not apply.
- </para>
-
- <para>
- <literal>\copy <replaceable
- class="parameter">table</replaceable> from <replaceable
- class="parameter">stdin | stdout</replaceable></literal>
- reads/writes based on the command input and output respectively.
- All rows are read from the same source that issued the command,
- continuing until <literal>\.</literal> is read or the stream
- reaches <acronym>EOF</>. Output is sent to the same place as
- command output. To read/write from
- <application>psql</application>'s standard input or output, use
- <literal>pstdin</> or <literal>pstdout</>. This option is useful
- for populating tables in-line within a SQL script file.
- </para>
+ </para>
+
+ The syntax of the command is similar to that of the
+
<acronym>SQL</acronym> <xref linkend="sql-copy"
+ endterm="sql-copy-title"> command. Note that, because of this,
+ special parsing rules apply to the <command>\copy</command>
+ command. In particular, the variable substitution rules and
+ backslash escapes do not apply.
+ </para>
+
+ <literal>\copy <replaceable
+ class="parameter">table</replaceable> from <replaceable
+ class="parameter">stdin | stdout</replaceable></literal>
+ reads/writes based on the command input and output respectively.
+ All rows are read from the same source that issued the command,
+ continuing until <literal>\.</literal> is read or the stream
+
reaches <acronym>EOF</>. Output is sent to the same place as
+ command output. To read/write from
+
<application>psql</application>'s standard input or output, use
+ <literal>pstdin</> or <literal>pstdout</>. This option is useful
+ for populating tables in-line within a SQL script file.
+ </para>
<tip>
<para>
- This operation is not as efficient as the <acronym>SQL</acronym>
- <command>COPY</command> command because all data must pass
- through the client/server connection. For large
- amounts of data the <acronym>SQL</acronym> command may be preferable.
+
This operation is not as efficient as the <acronym>SQL</acronym>
+ <command>COPY</command> command because all data must pass
+ through the client/server connection. For large
+
amounts of data the <acronym>SQL</acronym> command may be preferable.
</para>
</tip>
<listitem>
<para>
- For each relation (table, view, index, or sequence) matching the
- <replaceable class="parameter">pattern</replaceable>, show all
- columns, their types, and any special
- attributes such as <literal>NOT NULL</literal> or defaults, if
- any. Associated indexes, constraints, rules, and triggers are
- also shown, as is the view definition if the relation is a view.
- (<quote>Matching the pattern</> is defined below.)
- </para>
+ For each relation (table, view, index, or sequence) matching the
+ <replaceable class="parameter">pattern</replaceable>, show all
+ columns, their types, and any special
+ attributes such as <literal>NOT NULL</literal> or defaults, if
+ any. Associated indexes, constraints, rules, and triggers are
+ also shown, as is the view definition if the relation is a view.
+ (<quote>Matching the pattern</> is defined below.)
+ </para>
- <para>
- The command form <literal>\d+</literal> is identical, except that
- more information is displayed: any comments associated with the
- columns of the table are shown, as is the presence of OIDs in the
- table.
- </para>
+ The command form <literal>\d+</literal> is identical, except that
+ more information is displayed: any comments associated with the
+ columns of the table are shown, as is the presence of OIDs in the
+ table.
+ </para>
- <note>
- <para>
- If <command>\d</command> is used without a
- <replaceable class="parameter">pattern</replaceable> argument, it is
- equivalent to <command>\dtvs</command> which will show a list of
- all tables, views, and sequences. This is purely a convenience
- measure.
- </para>
- </note>
- </listitem>
+ <note>
+ If <command>\d</command> is used without a
+ <replaceable class="parameter">pattern</replaceable> argument, it is
+ equivalent to <command>\dtvs</command> which will show a list of
+ all tables, views, and sequences. This is purely a convenience
+ measure.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
</varlistentry>
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><literal>\db [ <replaceable class="parameter">pattern</replaceable> ]</literal></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>
+ Lists all available tablespaces. If <replaceable
+ class="parameter">pattern</replaceable>
+ is specified, only tablespaces whose names match the pattern are shown.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+
<varlistentry>
<term><literal>\dc [ <replaceable class="parameter">pattern</replaceable> ]</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>
Lists all available conversions between character-set encodings.
- If <replaceable class="parameter">pattern</replaceable>
+ If <replaceable class="parameter">pattern</replaceable>
is specified, only conversions whose names match the pattern are
- listed.
+ listed.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<para>
Shows the descriptions of objects matching the <replaceable
class="parameter">pattern</replaceable>, or of all visible objects if
- no argument is given. But in either case, only objects that have
- a description are listed.
+ no argument is given. But in either case, only objects that have
+ a description are listed.
(<quote>Object</quote> covers aggregates, functions, operators,
types, relations (tables, views, indexes, sequences, large
objects), rules, and triggers.) For example:
return types. If <replaceable
class="parameter">pattern</replaceable>
is specified, only functions whose names match the pattern are shown.
- If the form <literal>\df+</literal> is used, additional information about
+ If the form <literal>\df+</literal> is used, additional information about
each function, including language and description, is shown.
</para>
<para>
To reduce clutter, <literal>\df</> does not show data type I/O
- functions. This is implemented by ignoring functions that accept
- or return type <type>cstring</>.
+ functions. This is implemented by ignoring functions that accept
+ or return type <type>cstring</>.
</para>
</note>
<varlistentry>
<term><literal>\distvS [ <replaceable class="parameter">pattern</replaceable> ]</literal></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- This is not the actual command name: the letters
- <literal>i</literal>, <literal>s</literal>, <literal>t</literal>,
- <literal>v</literal>, <literal>S</literal> stand for index,
- sequence, table, view, and system table, respectively. You can
- specify any or all of these letters, in any order, to obtain a
- listing of all the matching objects. The letter S restricts the
- listing to system objects; without <literal>S</literal>, only
- non-system objects are shown. If <literal>+</literal> is appended
- to the command name, each object is listed with its associated
- description, if any.
- </para>
+ <listitem>
+ This is not the actual command name: the letters
+ <literal>i</literal>, <literal>s</literal>, <literal>t</literal>,
+ <literal>v</literal>, <literal>S</literal> stand for index,
+ sequence, table, view, and system table, respectively. You can
+ specify any or all of these letters, in any order, to obtain a
+ listing of all the matching objects. The letter S restricts the
+ listing to system objects; without <literal>S</literal>, only
+ non-system objects are shown. If <literal>+</literal> is appended
+ to the command name, each object is listed with its associated
+ description, if any.
+ </para>
- <para>
- If <replaceable class="parameter">pattern</replaceable> is
- specified, only objects whose names match the pattern are listed.
- </para>
- </listitem>
+ If <replaceable class="parameter">pattern</replaceable> is
+ specified, only objects whose names match the pattern are listed.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><literal>\dl</literal></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- This is an alias for <command>\lo_list</command>, which shows a
- list of large objects.
- </para>
- </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+ This is an alias for <command>\lo_list</command>, which shows a
+ list of large objects.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<listitem>
<para>
Lists available operators with their operand and return types.
- If <replaceable class="parameter">pattern</replaceable> is
- specified, only operators whose names match the pattern are listed.
+ If <replaceable class="parameter">pattern</replaceable> is
+ specified, only operators whose names match the pattern are listed.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><literal>\dp [ <replaceable class="parameter">pattern</replaceable> ]</literal></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
+ <listitem>
Produces a list of all available tables, views and sequences with their
associated access privileges.
- If <replaceable class="parameter">pattern</replaceable> is
- specified, only tables, views and sequences whose names match the pattern are listed.
- </para>
+ If <replaceable class="parameter">pattern</replaceable> is
+ specified, only tables, views and sequences whose names match the pattern are listed.
+ </para>
- <para>
- The commands <xref linkend="SQL-GRANT"> and
- <xref linkend="SQL-REVOKE">
- are used to set access privileges. See <xref linkend="SQL-GRANT">
- for more information.
- </para>
- </listitem>
+ The commands <xref linkend="SQL-GRANT"> and
+ <xref linkend="SQL-REVOKE">
+ are used to set access privileges. See <xref linkend="SQL-GRANT">
+ for more information.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><literal>\echo <replaceable class="parameter">text</replaceable> [ ... ]</literal></term>
<listitem>
- <para>
Prints the arguments to the standard output, separated by one
space and followed by a newline. This can be useful to
intersperse information in the output of scripts. For example:
</programlisting>
If the first argument is an unquoted <literal>-n</literal> the the trailing
newline is not written.
- </para>
+ </para>
- <tip>
- <para>
- If you use the <command>\o</command> command to redirect your
- query output you may wish to use <command>\qecho</command>
- instead of this command.
- </para>
- </tip>
- </listitem>
+ <tip>
+ If you use the <command>\o</command> command to redirect your
+ query output you may wish to use <command>\qecho</command>
+ instead of this command.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<acronym>SQL</acronym> commands is shown.
</para>
- <note>
- <para>
- To simplify typing, commands that consists of several words do
- not have to be quoted. Thus it is fine to type <userinput>\help
- alter table</userinput>.
- </para>
- </note>
+ <note>
+ To simplify typing, commands that consists of several words do
+ not have to be quoted. Thus it is fine to type <userinput>\help
+ alter table</userinput>.
+ </para>
+ </note>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<term><literal>\H</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>
- Turns on <acronym>HTML</acronym> query output format. If the
- <acronym>HTML</acronym> format is already on, it is switched
- back to the default aligned text format. This command is for
- compatibility and convenience, but see <command>\pset</command>
- about setting other output options.
+
Turns on <acronym>HTML</acronym> query output format. If the
+
<acronym>HTML</acronym> format is already on, it is switched
+ back to the default aligned text format. This command is for
+ compatibility and convenience, but see <command>\pset</command>
+ about setting other output options.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
class="parameter">filename</replaceable> and executes it as
though it had been typed on the keyboard.
</para>
- <note>
- <para>
- If you want to see the lines on the screen as they are read you
- must set the variable <varname>ECHO</varname> to
- <literal>all</literal>.
- </para>
- </note>
+ <note>
+ If you want to see the lines on the screen as they are read you
+ must set the variable <varname>ECHO</varname> to
+ <literal>all</literal>.
+ </para>
+ </note>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><literal>\lo_export <replaceable class="parameter">loid</replaceable> <replaceable class="parameter">filename</replaceable></literal></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- Reads the large object with <acronym>OID</acronym> <replaceable
- class="parameter">loid</replaceable> from the database and
- writes it to <replaceable
- class="parameter">filename</replaceable>. Note that this is
- subtly different from the server function
- <function>lo_export</function>, which acts with the permissions
- of the user that the database server runs as and on the server's
- file system.
- </para>
- <tip>
- <para>
- Use <command>\lo_list</command> to find out the large object's
- <acronym>OID</acronym>.
- </para>
- </tip>
- </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+
Reads the large object with <acronym>OID</acronym> <replaceable
+ class="parameter">loid</replaceable> from the database and
+ writes it to <replaceable
+ class="parameter">filename</replaceable>. Note that this is
+ subtly different from the server function
+ <function>lo_export</function>, which acts with the permissions
+ of the user that the database server runs as and on the server's
+ file system.
+ </para>
+ <tip>
+ Use <command>\lo_list</command> to find out the large object's
+
<acronym>OID</acronym>.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><literal>\lo_import <replaceable class="parameter">filename</replaceable> [ <replaceable class="parameter">comment</replaceable> ]</literal></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- Stores the file into a <productname>PostgreSQL</productname>
- large object. Optionally, it associates the given
- comment with the object. Example:
+ <listitem>
+
Stores the file into a <productname>PostgreSQL</productname>
+ large object. Optionally, it associates the given
+ comment with the object. Example:
<programlisting>
foo=> <userinput>\lo_import '/home/peter/pictures/photo.xcf' 'a picture of me'</userinput>
lo_import 152801
</programlisting>
- The response indicates that the large object received object ID
- 152801 which one ought to remember if one wants to access the
- object ever again. For that reason it is recommended to always
- associate a human-readable comment with every object. Those can
- then be seen with the <command>\lo_list</command> command.
- </para>
+ The response indicates that the large object received object ID
+ 152801 which one ought to remember if one wants to access the
+ object ever again. For that reason it is recommended to always
+ associate a human-readable comment with every object. Those can
+ then be seen with the <command>\lo_list</command> command.
+ </para>
- <para>
- Note that this command is subtly different from the server-side
- <function>lo_import</function> because it acts as the local user
- on the local file system, rather than the server's user and file
- system.
- </para>
- </listitem>
+ Note that this command is subtly different from the server-side
+ <function>lo_import</function> because it acts as the local user
+ on the local file system, rather than the server's user and file
+ system.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><literal>\lo_list</literal></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- Shows a list of all <productname>PostgreSQL</productname>
- large objects currently stored in the database,
- along with any comments provided for them.
- </para>
- </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+
Shows a list of all <productname>PostgreSQL</productname>
+ large objects currently stored in the database,
+ along with any comments provided for them.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><literal>\lo_unlink <replaceable class="parameter">loid</replaceable></literal></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- Deletes the large object with <acronym>OID</acronym>
- <replaceable class="parameter">loid</replaceable> from the
- database.
- </para>
+ <listitem>
+
Deletes the large object with <acronym>OID</acronym>
+ <replaceable class="parameter">loid</replaceable> from the
+ database.
+ </para>
- <tip>
- <para>
- Use <command>\lo_list</command> to find out the large object's
- <acronym>OID</acronym>.
- </para>
- </tip>
- </listitem>
+ <tip>
+ Use <command>\lo_list</command> to find out the large object's
+
<acronym>OID</acronym>.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
specified, the query output will be reset to the standard output.
</para>
- <para>
- <quote>Query results</quote> includes all tables, command
- responses, and notices obtained from the database server, as
- well as output of various backslash commands that query the
- database (such as <command>\d</command>), but not error
- messages.
- </para>
+ <quote>Query results</quote> includes all tables, command
+ responses, and notices obtained from the database server, as
+ well as output of various backslash commands that query the
+ database (such as <command>\d</command>), but not error
+ messages.
+ </para>
- <tip>
- <para>
- To intersperse text output in between query results, use
- <command>\qecho</command>.
- </para>
- </tip>
+ <tip>
+ To intersperse text output in between query results, use
+ <command>\qecho</command>.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><literal>\pset <replaceable class="parameter">parameter</replaceable> [ <replaceable class="parameter">value</replaceable> ]</literal></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- This command sets options affecting the output of query result
- tables. <replaceable class="parameter">parameter</replaceable>
- describes which option is to be set. The semantics of
- <replaceable class="parameter">value</replaceable> depend
- thereon.
- </para>
-
- <para>
- Adjustable printing options are:
- <variablelist>
- <varlistentry>
- <term><literal>format</literal></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- Sets the output format to one of <literal>unaligned</literal>,
- <literal>aligned</literal>, <literal>html</literal>, or
- <literal>latex</literal>. Unique abbreviations are allowed.
- (That would mean one letter is enough.)
- </para>
-
- <para>
- <quote>Unaligned</quote> writes all columns of a row on a
- line, separated by the currently active field separator. This
- is intended to create output that might be intended to be read
- in by other programs (tab-separated, comma-separated).
- <quote>Aligned</quote> mode is the standard, human-readable,
- nicely formatted text output that is default. The
- <quote><acronym>HTML</acronym></quote> and
- <quote>LaTeX</quote> modes put out tables that are intended to
- be included in documents using the respective mark-up
- language. They are not complete documents! (This might not be
- so dramatic in <acronym>HTML</acronym>, but in LaTeX you must
- have a complete document wrapper.)
- </para>
- </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+ This command sets options affecting the output of query result
+ tables. <replaceable class="parameter">parameter</replaceable>
+ describes which option is to be set. The semantics of
+ <replaceable class="parameter">value</replaceable> depend
+ thereon.
+ </para>
+
+ Adjustable printing options are:
+ <variablelist>
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><literal>format</literal></term>
+ <listitem>
+ Sets the output format to one of <literal>unaligned</literal>,
+ <literal>aligned</literal>, <literal>html</literal>, or
+ <literal>latex</literal>. Unique abbreviations are allowed.
+ (That would mean one letter is enough.)
+ </para>
+
+ <quote>Unaligned</quote> writes all columns of a row on a
+ line, separated by the currently active field separator. This
+ is intended to create output that might be intended to be read
+ in by other programs (tab-separated, comma-separated).
+ <quote>Aligned</quote> mode is the standard, human-readable,
+ nicely formatted text output that is default. The
+
<quote><acronym>HTML</acronym></quote> and
+ <quote>LaTeX</quote> modes put out tables that are intended to
+ be included in documents using the respective mark-up
+ language. They are not complete documents! (This might not be
+
so dramatic in <acronym>HTML</acronym>, but in LaTeX you must
+ have a complete document wrapper.)
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
- <varlistentry>
- <term><literal>border</literal></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- The second argument must be a number. In general, the higher
- the number the more borders and lines the tables will have,
- but this depends on the particular format. In
- <acronym>HTML</acronym> mode, this will translate directly
- into the <literal>border=...</literal> attribute, in the
- others only values 0 (no border), 1 (internal dividing lines),
- and 2 (table frame) make sense.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </varlistentry>
-
- <varlistentry>
- <term><literal>expanded</literal> (or <literal>x</literal>)</term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- Toggles between regular and expanded format. When expanded
- format is enabled, all output has two columns with the column
- name on the left and the data on the right. This mode is
- useful if the data wouldn't fit on the screen in the normal
- <quote>horizontal</quote> mode.
- </para>
-
- <para>
- Expanded mode is supported by all four output formats.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </varlistentry>
-
- <varlistentry>
- <term><literal>null</literal></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- The second argument is a string that should be printed
- whenever a column is null. The default is not to print
- anything, which can easily be mistaken for, say, an empty
- string. Thus, one might choose to write <literal>\pset null
- '(null)'</literal>.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </varlistentry>
-
- <varlistentry>
- <term><literal>fieldsep</literal></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- Specifies the field separator to be used in unaligned output
- mode. That way one can create, for example, tab- or
- comma-separated output, which other programs might prefer. To
- set a tab as field separator, type <literal>\pset fieldsep
- '\t'</literal>. The default field separator is
- <literal>'|'</literal> (a vertical bar).
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </varlistentry>
-
- <varlistentry>
- <term><literal>footer</literal></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- Toggles the display of the default footer <literal>(x
- rows)</literal>.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </varlistentry>
-
- <varlistentry>
- <term><literal>recordsep</literal></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><literal>border</literal></term>
+ <listitem>
+ The second argument must be a number. In general, the higher
+ the number the more borders and lines the tables will have,
+ but this depends on the particular format. In
+
<acronym>HTML</acronym> mode, this will translate directly
+ into the <literal>border=...</literal> attribute, in the
+ others only values 0 (no border), 1 (internal dividing lines),
+ and 2 (table frame) make sense.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><literal>expanded</literal> (or <literal>x</literal>)</term>
+ <listitem>
+ Toggles between regular and expanded format. When expanded
+ format is enabled, all output has two columns with the column
+ name on the left and the data on the right. This mode is
+ useful if the data wouldn't fit on the screen in the normal
+ <quote>horizontal</quote> mode.
+ </para>
+
+ Expanded mode is supported by all four output formats.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><literal>null</literal></term>
+ <listitem>
+ The second argument is a string that should be printed
+ whenever a column is null. The default is not to print
+ anything, which can easily be mistaken for, say, an empty
+ string. Thus, one might choose to write <literal>\pset null
+ '(null)'</literal>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><literal>fieldsep</literal></term>
+ <listitem>
+ Specifies the field separator to be used in unaligned output
+ mode. That way one can create, for example, tab- or
+ comma-separated output, which other programs might prefer. To
+ set a tab as field separator, type <literal>\pset fieldsep
+ '\t'</literal>. The default field separator is
+ <literal>'|'</literal> (a vertical bar).
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><literal>footer</literal></term>
+ <listitem>
+ Toggles the display of the default footer <literal>(x
+ rows)</literal>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><literal>recordsep</literal></term>
+ <listitem>
Specifies the record (line) separator to use in unaligned
output mode. The default is a newline character.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </varlistentry>
-
- <varlistentry>
- <term><literal>tuples_only</literal> (or <literal>t</literal>)</term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- Toggles between tuples only and full display. Full display may
- show extra information such as column headers, titles, and
- various footers. In tuples only mode, only actual table data
- is shown.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </varlistentry>
-
- <varlistentry>
- <term><literal>title [ <replaceable class="parameter">text</replaceable> ]</literal></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- Sets the table title for any subsequently printed tables. This
- can be used to give your output descriptive tags. If no
- argument is given, the title is unset.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </varlistentry>
-
- <varlistentry>
- <term><literal>tableattr</literal> (or <literal>T</literal>) <literal>[ <replaceable class="parameter">text</replaceable> ]</literal></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- Allows you to specify any attributes to be placed inside the
- <acronym>HTML</acronym> <sgmltag>table</sgmltag> tag. This
- could for example be <literal>cellpadding</literal> or
- <literal>bgcolor</literal>. Note that you probably don't want
- to specify <literal>border</literal> here, as that is already
- taken care of by <literal>\pset border</literal>.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </varlistentry>
-
-
- <varlistentry>
- <term><literal>pager</literal></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- Controls use of a pager for query and <application>psql</>
- help output. If the environment variable <envar>PAGER</envar>
- is set, the output is piped to the specified program.
- Otherwise a platform-dependent default (such as
- <filename>more</filename>) is used.
- </para>
-
- <para>
- When the pager is off, the pager is not used. When the pager
- is on, the pager is used only when appropriate, i.e. the
- output is to a terminal and will not fit on the screen.
- (<application>psql</> does not do a perfect job of estimating
- when to use the pager.) <literal>\pset pager</> turns the
- pager on and off. Pager can also be set to <literal>always</>,
- which causes the pager to be always used.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </varlistentry>
- </variablelist>
- </para>
-
- <para>
- Illustrations on how these different formats look can be seen in
- the <xref linkend="APP-PSQL-examples"
- endterm="APP-PSQL-examples-title"> section.
- </para>
-
- <tip>
- <para>
- There are various shortcut commands for <command>\pset</command>. See
- <command>\a</command>, <command>\C</command>, <command>\H</command>,
- <command>\t</command>, <command>\T</command>, and <command>\x</command>.
- </para>
- </tip>
-
- <note>
- <para>
- It is an error to call <command>\pset</command> without
- arguments. In the future this call might show the current status
- of all printing options.
- </para>
- </note>
-
- </listitem>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><literal>tuples_only</literal> (or <literal>t</literal>)</term>
+ <listitem>
+ Toggles between tuples only and full display. Full display may
+ show extra information such as column headers, titles, and
+ various footers. In tuples only mode, only actual table data
+ is shown.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><literal>title [ <replaceable class="parameter">text</replaceable> ]</literal></term>
+ <listitem>
+ Sets the table title for any subsequently printed tables. This
+ can be used to give your output descriptive tags. If no
+ argument is given, the title is unset.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><literal>tableattr</literal> (or <literal>T</literal>) <literal>[ <replaceable class="parameter">text</replaceable> ]</literal></term>
+ <listitem>
+ Allows you to specify any attributes to be placed inside the
+
<acronym>HTML</acronym> <sgmltag>table</sgmltag> tag. This
+ could for example be <literal>cellpadding</literal> or
+ <literal>bgcolor</literal>. Note that you probably don't want
+ to specify <literal>border</literal> here, as that is already
+ taken care of by <literal>\pset border</literal>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><literal>pager</literal></term>
+ <listitem>
+
Controls use of a pager for query and <application>psql</>
+ help output. If the environment variable <envar>PAGER</envar>
+ is set, the output is piped to the specified program.
+ Otherwise a platform-dependent default (such as
+ <filename>more</filename>) is used.
+ </para>
+
+ When the pager is off, the pager is not used. When the pager
+ is on, the pager is used only when appropriate, i.e. the
+ output is to a terminal and will not fit on the screen.
+
(<application>psql</> does not do a perfect job of estimating
+ when to use the pager.) <literal>\pset pager</> turns the
+ pager on and off. Pager can also be set to <literal>always</>,
+ which causes the pager to be always used.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ </variablelist>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>
+ Illustrations on how these different formats look can be seen in
+ the <xref linkend="APP-PSQL-examples"
+ endterm="APP-PSQL-examples-title"> section.
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ There are various shortcut commands for <command>\pset</command>. See
+ <command>\a</command>, <command>\C</command>, <command>\H</command>,
+ <command>\t</command>, <command>\T</command>, and <command>\x</command>.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <note>
+ It is an error to call <command>\pset</command> without
+ arguments. In the future this call might show the current status
+ of all printing options.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<term><literal>\qecho <replaceable class="parameter">text</replaceable> [ ... ] </literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>
- This command is identical to <command>\echo</command> except
- that all output will be written to the query output channel, as
- set by <command>\o</command>.
+ This command is identical to <command>\echo</command> except
+ that all output will be written to the query output channel, as
+ set by <command>\o</command>.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<acronym>GNU</acronym> history library.
</para>
- <note>
- <para>
- In the current version, it is no longer necessary to save the
- command history, since that will be done automatically on
- program termination. The history is also loaded automatically
- every time <application>psql</application> starts up.
- </para>
- </note>
+ <note>
+ In the current version, it is no longer necessary to save the
+ command history, since that will be done automatically on
+ program termination. The history is also loaded automatically
+
every time <application>psql</application> starts up.
+ </para>
+ </note>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><literal>\set [ <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> [ <replaceable class="parameter">value</replaceable> [ ... ] ] ]</literal></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- Sets the internal variable <replaceable
- class="parameter">name</replaceable> to <replaceable
- class="parameter">value</replaceable> or, if more than one value
- is given, to the concatenation of all of them. If no second
- argument is given, the variable is just set with no value. To
- unset a variable, use the <command>\unset</command> command.
- </para>
-
- <para>
- Valid variable names can contain characters, digits, and
- underscores. See the section <xref
- linkend="APP-PSQL-variables"
- endterm="APP-PSQL-variables-title"> below for details.
- Variable names are case-sensitive.
- </para>
-
- <para>
- Although you are welcome to set any variable to anything you
- want, <application>psql</application> treats several variables
- as special. They are documented in the section about variables.
- </para>
-
- <note>
- <para>
- This command is totally separate from the <acronym>SQL</acronym>
- command <xref linkend="SQL-SET" endterm="SQL-SET-title">.
- </para>
- </note>
- </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+ Sets the internal variable <replaceable
+ class="parameter">name</replaceable> to <replaceable
+ class="parameter">value</replaceable> or, if more than one value
+ is given, to the concatenation of all of them. If no second
+ argument is given, the variable is just set with no value. To
+ unset a variable, use the <command>\unset</command> command.
+ </para>
+
+ Valid variable names can contain characters, digits, and
+ underscores. See the section <xref
+ linkend="APP-PSQL-variables"
+ endterm="APP-PSQL-variables-title"> below for details.
+ Variable names are case-sensitive.
+ </para>
+
+ Although you are welcome to set any variable to anything you
+
want, <application>psql</application> treats several variables
+ as special. They are documented in the section about variables.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+
This command is totally separate from the <acronym>SQL</acronym>
+ command <xref linkend="SQL-SET" endterm="SQL-SET-title">.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<listitem>
<para>
Toggles extended table formatting mode. As such it is equivalent to
- <literal>\pset expanded</literal>.
+ <literal>\pset expanded</literal>.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<para>
Produces a list of all available tables, views and sequences with their
associated access privileges.
- If a <replaceable class="parameter">pattern</replaceable> is
- specified, only tables,views and sequences whose names match the pattern are listed.
- </para>
+ If a <replaceable class="parameter">pattern</replaceable> is
+ specified, only tables,views and sequences whose names match the pattern are listed.
+ </para>
- <para>
- The commands <xref linkend="SQL-GRANT"> and
- <xref linkend="SQL-REVOKE">
- are used to set access privileges. See <xref linkend="SQL-GRANT">
- for more information.
- </para>
+ The commands <xref linkend="SQL-GRANT"> and
+ <xref linkend="SQL-REVOKE">
+ are used to set access privileges. See <xref linkend="SQL-GRANT">
+ for more information.
+ </para>
- <para>
- This is an alias for <command>\dp</command> (<quote>display
- privileges</quote>).
+ This is an alias for <command>\dp</command> (<quote>display
+ privileges</quote>).
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
A pattern that contains an (unquoted) dot is interpreted as a schema
name pattern followed by an object name pattern. For example,
<literal>\dt foo*.bar*</> displays all tables in schemas whose name
- starts with <literal>foo</> and whose table name
+ starts with <literal>foo</> and whose table name
starts with <literal>bar</>. If no dot appears, then the pattern
matches only objects that are visible in the current schema search path.
</para>
<secondary>psql</secondary>
</indexterm>
<term><varname>AUTOCOMMIT</varname></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- When <literal>on</> (the default), each SQL command is automatically
- committed upon successful completion. To postpone commit in this
- mode, you must enter a <command>BEGIN</> or <command>START
- TRANSACTION</> SQL command. When <literal>off</> or unset, SQL
- commands are not committed until you explicitly issue
- <command>COMMIT</> or <command>END</>. The autocommit-off
- mode works by issuing an implicit <command>BEGIN</> for you, just
- before any command that is not already in a transaction block and
- is not itself a <command>BEGIN</> or other transaction-control
- command.
- </para>
-
- <note>
- <para>
- In autocommit-off mode, you must explicitly abandon any failed
- transaction by entering <command>ABORT</> or <command>ROLLBACK</>.
- Also keep in mind that if you exit the session
- without committing, your work will be lost.
- </para>
- </note>
-
- <note>
- <para>
- The autocommit-on mode is <productname>PostgreSQL</>'s traditional
- behavior, but autocommit-off is closer to the SQL spec. If you
- prefer autocommit-off, you may wish to set it in the system-wide
- <filename>psqlrc</filename> or your
+ <listitem>
+ When <literal>on</> (the default), each SQL command is automatically
+ committed upon successful completion. To postpone commit in this
+ mode, you must enter a <command>BEGIN</> or <command>START
+ TRANSACTION</> SQL command. When <literal>off</> or unset, SQL
+ commands are not committed until you explicitly issue
+ <command>COMMIT</> or <command>END</>. The autocommit-off
+ mode works by issuing an implicit <command>BEGIN</> for you, just
+ before any command that is not already in a transaction block and
+ is not itself a <command>BEGIN</> or other transaction-control
+ command.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ In autocommit-off mode, you must explicitly abandon any failed
+ transaction by entering <command>ABORT</> or <command>ROLLBACK</>.
+ Also keep in mind that if you exit the session
+ without committing, your work will be lost.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <note>
+
The autocommit-on mode is <productname>PostgreSQL</>'s traditional
+ behavior, but autocommit-off is closer to the SQL spec. If you
+ prefer autocommit-off, you may wish to set it in the system-wide
+ <filename>psqlrc</filename> or your
<filename>.psqlrc</filename> file.
- </para>
- </note>
- </listitem>
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><varname>DBNAME</varname></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
+ <listitem>
The name of the database you are currently connected to. This is
set every time you connect to a database (including program
start-up), but can be unset.
- </para>
- </listitem>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><varname>ECHO</varname></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- If set to <literal>all</literal>, all lines
- entered or from a script are written to the standard output
- before they are parsed or executed. To select this behavior on program
- start-up, use the switch <option>-a</option>. If set to
- <literal>queries</literal>,
- <application>psql</application> merely prints all queries as
- they are sent to the server. The switch for this is
- <option>-e</option>.
- </para>
- </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+ If set to <literal>all</literal>, all lines
+ entered or from a script are written to the standard output
+ before they are parsed or executed. To select this behavior on program
+ start-up, use the switch <option>-a</option>. If set to
+ <literal>queries</literal>,
+
<application>psql</application> merely prints all queries as
+ they are sent to the server. The switch for this is
+ <option>-e</option>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><varname>ECHO_HIDDEN</varname></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- When this variable is set and a backslash command queries the
- database, the query is first shown. This way you can study the
- <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> internals and provide
- similar functionality in your own programs. (To select this behavior
- on program start-up, use the switch <option>-E</option>.) If you set
- the variable to the value <literal>noexec</literal>, the queries are
- just shown but are not actually sent to the server and executed.
- </para>
- </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+ When this variable is set and a backslash command queries the
+ database, the query is first shown. This way you can study the
+
<productname>PostgreSQL</productname> internals and provide
+ similar functionality in your own programs. (To select this behavior
+ on program start-up, use the switch <option>-E</option>.) If you set
+ the variable to the value <literal>noexec</literal>, the queries are
+ just shown but are not actually sent to the server and executed.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><varname>ENCODING</varname></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
+ <listitem>
The current client character set encoding.
- </para>
- </listitem>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><varname>HISTCONTROL</varname></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
+ <listitem>
If this variable is set to <literal>ignorespace</literal>,
lines which begin with a space are not entered into the history
list. If set to a value of <literal>ignoredups</literal>, lines
<literal>ignoreboth</literal> combines the two options. If
unset, or if set to any other value than those above, all lines
read in interactive mode are saved on the history list.
- </para>
+ </para>
<note>
<para>
This feature was shamelessly plagiarized from
<application>Bash</application>.
</para>
</note>
- </listitem>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><varname>HISTSIZE</varname></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
+ <listitem>
The number of commands to store in the command history. The
default value is 500.
- </para>
+ </para>
<note>
<para>
This feature was shamelessly plagiarized from
<application>Bash</application>.
</para>
</note>
- </listitem>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><varname>HOST</varname></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
+ <listitem>
The database server host you are currently connected to. This is
set every time you connect to a database (including program
start-up), but can be unset.
- </para>
- </listitem>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><varname>IGNOREEOF</varname></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
+ <listitem>
If unset, sending an <acronym>EOF</> character (usually
<keycombo action="simul"><keycap>Control</><keycap>D</></>)
to an interactive session of <application>psql</application>
that many <acronym>EOF</> characters are ignored before the
application terminates. If the variable is set but has no
numeric value, the default is 10.
- </para>
+ </para>
<note>
<para>
This feature was shamelessly plagiarized from
<application>Bash</application>.
</para>
</note>
- </listitem>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><varname>LASTOID</varname></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
+ <listitem>
The value of the last affected OID, as returned from an
<command>INSERT</command> or <command>lo_insert</command>
command. This variable is only guaranteed to be valid until
after the result of the next <acronym>SQL</acronym> command has
been displayed.
- </para>
- </listitem>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><varname>ON_ERROR_STOP</varname></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- By default, if non-interactive scripts encounter an error, such
- as a malformed <acronym>SQL</acronym> command or internal
- meta-command, processing continues. This has been the
- traditional behavior of <application>psql</application> but it
- is sometimes not desirable. If this variable is set, script
- processing will immediately terminate. If the script was called
- from another script it will terminate in the same fashion. If
- the outermost script was not called from an interactive
- <application>psql</application> session but rather using the
- <option>-f</option> option, <application>psql</application> will
- return error code 3, to distinguish this case from fatal error
- conditions (error code 1).
- </para>
- </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+ By default, if non-interactive scripts encounter an error, such
+
as a malformed <acronym>SQL</acronym> command or internal
+ meta-command, processing continues. This has been the
+
traditional behavior of <application>psql</application> but it
+ is sometimes not desirable. If this variable is set, script
+ processing will immediately terminate. If the script was called
+ from another script it will terminate in the same fashion. If
+ the outermost script was not called from an interactive
+
<application>psql</application> session but rather using the
+
<option>-f</option> option, <application>psql</application> will
+ return error code 3, to distinguish this case from fatal error
+ conditions (error code 1).
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><varname>PORT</varname></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
+ <listitem>
The database server port to which you are currently connected.
This is set every time you connect to a database (including
program start-up), but can be unset.
- </para>
- </listitem>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><varname>PROMPT1</varname></term>
<term><varname>PROMPT2</varname></term>
<term><varname>PROMPT3</varname></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- These specify what the prompts <application>psql</application>
- issues should look like. See <xref
- linkend="APP-PSQL-prompting"
- endterm="APP-PSQL-prompting-title"> below.
- </para>
- </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+
These specify what the prompts <application>psql</application>
+ issues should look like. See <xref
+ linkend="APP-PSQL-prompting"
+ endterm="APP-PSQL-prompting-title"> below.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><varname>QUIET</varname></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- This variable is equivalent to the command line option
- <option>-q</option>. It is probably not too useful in
- interactive mode.
- </para>
- </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+ This variable is equivalent to the command line option
+ <option>-q</option>. It is probably not too useful in
+ interactive mode.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><varname>SINGLELINE</varname></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- This variable is equivalent to the command line option
- <option>-S</option>.
- </para>
- </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+ This variable is equivalent to the command line option
+ <option>-S</option>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><varname>SINGLESTEP</varname></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- This variable is equivalent to the command line option
- <option>-s</option>.
- </para>
- </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+ This variable is equivalent to the command line option
+ <option>-s</option>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><varname>USER</varname></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
+ <listitem>
The database user you are currently connected as. This is set
every time you connect to a database (including program
start-up), but can be unset.
- </para>
- </listitem>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><varname>VERBOSITY</varname></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- This variable can be set to the values <literal>default</>,
- <literal>verbose</>, or <literal>terse</> to control the verbosity
- of error reports.
- </para>
- </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+ This variable can be set to the values <literal>default</>,
+ <literal>verbose</>, or <literal>terse</> to control the verbosity
+ of error reports.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
</variablelist>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry>
<term><literal>%M</literal></term>
- <listitem>
+ <listitem>
<para>
The full host name (with domain name) of the database server,
or <literal>[local]</literal> if the connection is over a Unix
<varlistentry>
<term><literal>%m</literal></term>
- <listitem>
+ <listitem>
<para>
The host name of the database server, truncated at the
first dot, or <literal>[local]</literal> if the connection is
<varlistentry>
<term><literal>%></literal></term>
- <listitem><para>The port number at which the database server is listening.</para></listitem>
+
<listitem><para>The port number at which the database server is listening.</para></listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><literal>%n</literal></term>
- <listitem>
+ <listitem>
<para>
The database session user name. (The expansion of this
value might change during a database session as the result
<varlistentry>
<term><literal>%/</literal></term>
- <listitem><para>The name of the current database.</para></listitem>
+
<listitem><para>The name of the current database.</para></listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><literal>%~</literal></term>
- <listitem><para>Like <literal>%/</literal>, but the output is <literal>~</literal>
+
<listitem><para>Like <literal>%/</literal>, but the output is <literal>~</literal>
(tilde) if the database is your default database.</para></listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><literal>%#</literal></term>
- <listitem>
+ <listitem>
<para>
If the session user is a database superuser, then a
<literal>#</literal>, otherwise a <literal>></literal>.
<varlistentry>
<term><literal>%R</literal></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- In prompt 1 normally <literal>=</literal>, but <literal>^</literal> if
- in single-line mode, and <literal>!</literal> if the session is
- disconnected from the database (which can happen if
- <command>\connect</command> fails). In prompt 2 the sequence is
- replaced by <literal>-</literal>, <literal>*</literal>, a single quote,
- or a double quote, depending on whether
- <application>psql</application> expects more input because the
- command wasn't terminated yet, because you are inside a
- <literal>/* ... */</literal> comment, or because you are inside
- a quote. In prompt 3 the sequence doesn't produce anything.
- </para>
- </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+ In prompt 1 normally <literal>=</literal>, but <literal>^</literal> if
+ in single-line mode, and <literal>!</literal> if the session is
+ disconnected from the database (which can happen if
+ <command>\connect</command> fails). In prompt 2 the sequence is
+ replaced by <literal>-</literal>, <literal>*</literal>, a single quote,
+ or a double quote, depending on whether
+
<application>psql</application> expects more input because the
+ command wasn't terminated yet, because you are inside a
+ <literal>/* ... */</literal> comment, or because you are inside
+ a quote. In prompt 3 the sequence doesn't produce anything.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><literal>%x</literal></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- Transaction status: an empty string when not in a transaction
- block, or <literal>*</> when in a transaction block, or
- <literal>!</> when in a failed transaction block, or <literal>?</>
- when the transaction state is indeterminate (for example, because
- there is no connection).
- </para>
- </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+ Transaction status: an empty string when not in a transaction
+ block, or <literal>*</> when in a transaction block, or
+ <literal>!</> when in a failed transaction block, or <literal>?</>
+ when the transaction state is indeterminate (for example, because
+ there is no connection).
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><literal>%</literal><replaceable class="parameter">digits</replaceable></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- The character with the indicated numeric code is substituted.
- If <replaceable class="parameter">digits</replaceable> starts
- with <literal>0x</literal> the rest of the characters are
- interpreted as hexadecimal; otherwise if the first digit is
- <literal>0</literal> the digits are interpreted as octal;
- otherwise the digits are read as a decimal number.
- </para>
- </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+ The character with the indicated numeric code is substituted.
+ If <replaceable class="parameter">digits</replaceable> starts
+ with <literal>0x</literal> the rest of the characters are
+ interpreted as hexadecimal; otherwise if the first digit is
+ <literal>0</literal> the digits are interpreted as octal;
+ otherwise the digits are read as a decimal number.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><literal>%:</literal><replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable><literal>:</literal></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- The value of the <application>psql</application> variable
- <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>. See the
- section <xref linkend="APP-PSQL-variables"
- endterm="APP-PSQL-variables-title"> for details.
- </para>
- </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+
The value of the <application>psql</application> variable
+ <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>. See the
+ section <xref linkend="APP-PSQL-variables"
+ endterm="APP-PSQL-variables-title"> for details.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><literal>%`</literal><replaceable class="parameter">command</replaceable><literal>`</literal></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- The output of <replaceable
- class="parameter">command</replaceable>, similar to ordinary
- <quote>back-tick</quote> substitution.
- </para>
- </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+ The output of <replaceable
+ class="parameter">command</replaceable>, similar to ordinary
+ <quote>back-tick</quote> substitution.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
<term><literal>%[</literal> ... <literal>%]</literal></term>
- <listitem>
+ <listitem>
<para>
Prompts may contain terminal control characters which, for
example, change the color, background, or style of the prompt
</programlisting>
results in a boldfaced (<literal>1;</literal>) yellow-on-black
(<literal>33;40</literal>) prompt on VT100-compatible, color-capable
- terminals.
- </para>
+ terminals.
+ </para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<para>
Before starting up, <application>psql</application> attempts to
read and execute commands from the the system-wide
- <filename>psqlrc</filename> file and the
+ <filename>psqlrc</filename> file and the
<filename>$HOME/.psqlrc</filename> file in the user's home
- directory. See <filename><replaceable>PREFIX</>/share/psqlrc.sample</>
- for information on setting up the system-wide file. It could be used
+ directory. See <filename><replaceable>PREFIX</>/share/psqlrc.sample</>
+ for information on setting up the system-wide file. It could be used
to set up the client or the server to taste (using the <command>\set
</command> and <command>SET</command> commands).
</para>
<!--
-$PostgreSQL: pgsql/doc/src/sgml/ref/revoke.sgml,v 1.30 2004/06/01 21:49:21 tgl Exp $
+$PostgreSQL: pgsql/doc/src/sgml/ref/revoke.sgml,v 1.31 2004/06/18 06:13:05 tgl Exp $
PostgreSQL documentation
-->
FROM { <replaceable class="PARAMETER">username</replaceable> | GROUP <replaceable class="PARAMETER">groupname</replaceable> | PUBLIC } [, ...]
[ CASCADE | RESTRICT ]
+REVOKE [ GRANT OPTION FOR ]
+ { CREATE | ALL [ PRIVILEGES ] }
+ ON TABLESPACE <replaceable>tablespacename</replaceable> [, ...]
+ FROM { <replaceable class="PARAMETER">username</replaceable> | GROUP <replaceable class="PARAMETER">groupname</replaceable> | PUBLIC } [, ...]
+ [ CASCADE | RESTRICT ]
+
REVOKE [ GRANT OPTION FOR ]
{ EXECUTE | ALL [ PRIVILEGES ] }
ON FUNCTION <replaceable>funcname</replaceable> ([<replaceable>type</replaceable>, ...]) [, ...]
<!-- reference.sgml
-$PostgreSQL: pgsql/doc/src/sgml/reference.sgml,v 1.47 2004/04/20 01:14:55 momjian Exp $
+$PostgreSQL: pgsql/doc/src/sgml/reference.sgml,v 1.48 2004/06/18 06:13:02 tgl Exp $
PostgreSQL Reference Manual
-->
&createSequence;
&createTable;
&createTableAs;
+ &createTableSpace;
&createTrigger;
&createType;
&createUser;
&dropSchema;
&dropSequence;
&dropTable;
+ &dropTableSpace;
&dropTrigger;
&dropType;
&dropUser;
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/heapam.c,v 1.168 2004/05/27 17:12:37 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/heapam.c,v 1.169 2004/06/18 06:13:09 tgl Exp $
*
*
* INTERFACE ROUTINES
static void
out_target(char *buf, xl_heaptid *target)
{
- sprintf(buf + strlen(buf), "node %u/%u; tid %u/%u",
- target->node.tblNode, target->node.relNode,
+ sprintf(buf + strlen(buf), "rel %u/%u/%u; tid %u/%u",
+ target->node.spcNode, target->node.dbNode, target->node.relNode,
ItemPointerGetBlockNumber(&(target->tid)),
ItemPointerGetOffsetNumber(&(target->tid)));
}
{
xl_heap_clean *xlrec = (xl_heap_clean *) rec;
- sprintf(buf + strlen(buf), "clean: node %u/%u; blk %u",
- xlrec->node.tblNode, xlrec->node.relNode, xlrec->block);
+ sprintf(buf + strlen(buf), "clean: rel %u/%u/%u; blk %u",
+ xlrec->node.spcNode, xlrec->node.dbNode,
+ xlrec->node.relNode, xlrec->block);
}
else
strcat(buf, "UNKNOWN");
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtxlog.c,v 1.13 2004/06/02 17:28:17 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtxlog.c,v 1.14 2004/06/18 06:13:11 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
out_target(char *buf, xl_btreetid *target)
{
- sprintf(buf + strlen(buf), "node %u/%u; tid %u/%u",
- target->node.tblNode, target->node.relNode,
+ sprintf(buf + strlen(buf), "rel %u/%u/%u; tid %u/%u",
+ target->node.spcNode, target->node.dbNode, target->node.relNode,
ItemPointerGetBlockNumber(&(target->tid)),
ItemPointerGetOffsetNumber(&(target->tid)));
}
{
xl_btree_delete *xlrec = (xl_btree_delete *) rec;
- sprintf(buf + strlen(buf), "delete: node %u/%u; blk %u",
- xlrec->node.tblNode, xlrec->node.relNode, xlrec->block);
+ sprintf(buf + strlen(buf), "delete: rel %u/%u/%u; blk %u",
+ xlrec->node.spcNode, xlrec->node.dbNode,
+ xlrec->node.relNode, xlrec->block);
break;
}
case XLOG_BTREE_DELETE_PAGE:
{
xl_btree_newroot *xlrec = (xl_btree_newroot *) rec;
- sprintf(buf + strlen(buf), "newroot: node %u/%u; root %u lev %u",
- xlrec->node.tblNode, xlrec->node.relNode,
+ sprintf(buf + strlen(buf), "newroot: rel %u/%u/%u; root %u lev %u",
+ xlrec->node.spcNode, xlrec->node.dbNode,
+ xlrec->node.relNode,
xlrec->rootblk, xlrec->level);
break;
}
{
xl_btree_newmeta *xlrec = (xl_btree_newmeta *) rec;
- sprintf(buf + strlen(buf), "newmeta: node %u/%u; root %u lev %u fast %u lev %u",
- xlrec->node.tblNode, xlrec->node.relNode,
+ sprintf(buf + strlen(buf), "newmeta: rel %u/%u/%u; root %u lev %u fast %u lev %u",
+ xlrec->node.spcNode, xlrec->node.dbNode,
+ xlrec->node.relNode,
xlrec->meta.root, xlrec->meta.level,
xlrec->meta.fastroot, xlrec->meta.fastlevel);
break;
{
xl_btree_newpage *xlrec = (xl_btree_newpage *) rec;
- sprintf(buf + strlen(buf), "newpage: node %u/%u; page %u",
- xlrec->node.tblNode, xlrec->node.relNode,
- xlrec->blkno);
+ sprintf(buf + strlen(buf), "newpage: rel %u/%u/%u; page %u",
+ xlrec->node.spcNode, xlrec->node.dbNode,
+ xlrec->node.relNode, xlrec->blkno);
break;
}
default:
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2003, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/xlogutils.c,v 1.30 2004/02/11 22:55:24 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/xlogutils.c,v 1.31 2004/06/18 06:13:15 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* though, since we are presumably running by ourselves and can't
* have any lock conflicts ...
*/
- res->reldata.rd_lockInfo.lockRelId.dbId = rnode.tblNode;
+ res->reldata.rd_lockInfo.lockRelId.dbId = rnode.dbNode;
res->reldata.rd_lockInfo.lockRelId.relId = rnode.relNode;
hentry = (XLogRelCacheEntry *)
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/bootstrap/bootparse.y,v 1.69 2004/06/03 02:08:02 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/bootstrap/bootparse.y,v 1.70 2004/06/18 06:13:17 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#include "catalog/pg_attribute.h"
#include "catalog/pg_class.h"
#include "catalog/pg_namespace.h"
+#include "catalog/pg_tablespace.h"
#include "commands/defrem.h"
#include "miscadmin.h"
#include "nodes/makefuncs.h"
boot_reldesc = heap_create(LexIDStr($5),
PG_CATALOG_NAMESPACE,
+ $3 ? GLOBALTABLESPACE_OID : 0,
tupdesc,
$3,
true,
id = heap_create_with_catalog(LexIDStr($5),
PG_CATALOG_NAMESPACE,
+ $3 ? GLOBALTABLESPACE_OID : 0,
tupdesc,
RELKIND_RELATION,
$3,
DefineIndex(makeRangeVar(NULL, LexIDStr($5)),
LexIDStr($3),
LexIDStr($7),
+ NULL,
$9,
NULL, NIL,
false, false, false,
DefineIndex(makeRangeVar(NULL, LexIDStr($6)),
LexIDStr($4),
LexIDStr($8),
+ NULL,
$10,
NULL, NIL,
true, false, false,
#
# Makefile for backend/catalog
#
-# $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/Makefile,v 1.50 2004/01/04 05:57:21 tgl Exp $
+# $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/Makefile,v 1.51 2004/06/18 06:13:19 tgl Exp $
#
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------
pg_language.h pg_largeobject.h pg_aggregate.h pg_statistic.h \
pg_rewrite.h pg_trigger.h pg_listener.h pg_description.h pg_cast.h \
pg_namespace.h pg_conversion.h pg_database.h pg_shadow.h pg_group.h \
- pg_depend.h indexing.h \
+ pg_tablespace.h pg_depend.h indexing.h \
)
pg_includes := $(sort -I$(top_srcdir)/src/include -I$(top_builddir)/src/include)
uninstall-data:
rm -f $(addprefix $(DESTDIR)$(datadir)/, $(BKIFILES) system_views.sql information_schema.sql sql_features.txt)
-clean:
+clean:
rm -f SUBSYS.o $(OBJS) $(BKIFILES)
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/aclchk.c,v 1.103 2004/06/01 21:49:22 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/aclchk.c,v 1.104 2004/06/18 06:13:19 tgl Exp $
*
* NOTES
* See acl.h.
#include "catalog/pg_operator.h"
#include "catalog/pg_proc.h"
#include "catalog/pg_shadow.h"
+#include "catalog/pg_tablespace.h"
#include "catalog/pg_type.h"
#include "miscadmin.h"
#include "parser/parse_func.h"
static void ExecuteGrantStmt_Function(GrantStmt *stmt);
static void ExecuteGrantStmt_Language(GrantStmt *stmt);
static void ExecuteGrantStmt_Namespace(GrantStmt *stmt);
+static void ExecuteGrantStmt_Tablespace(GrantStmt *stmt);
static const char *privilege_to_string(AclMode privilege);
case ACL_OBJECT_NAMESPACE:
ExecuteGrantStmt_Namespace(stmt);
break;
+ case ACL_OBJECT_TABLESPACE:
+ ExecuteGrantStmt_Tablespace(stmt);
+ break;
default:
elog(ERROR, "unrecognized GrantStmt.objtype: %d",
(int) stmt->objtype);
}
}
+
static void
ExecuteGrantStmt_Relation(GrantStmt *stmt)
{
}
}
+static void
+ExecuteGrantStmt_Tablespace(GrantStmt *stmt)
+{
+ AclMode privileges;
+ bool all_privs;
+ ListCell *i;
+
+ if (linitial_int(stmt->privileges) == ACL_ALL_RIGHTS)
+ {
+ all_privs = true;
+ privileges = ACL_ALL_RIGHTS_TABLESPACE;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ all_privs = false;
+ privileges = ACL_NO_RIGHTS;
+ foreach(i, stmt->privileges)
+ {
+ AclMode priv = lfirst_int(i);
+
+ if (priv & ~((AclMode) ACL_ALL_RIGHTS_TABLESPACE))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_GRANT_OPERATION),
+ errmsg("invalid privilege type %s for tablespace",
+ privilege_to_string(priv))));
+ privileges |= priv;
+ }
+ }
+
+ foreach(i, stmt->objects)
+ {
+ char *spcname = strVal(lfirst(i));
+ Relation relation;
+ ScanKeyData entry[1];
+ HeapScanDesc scan;
+ HeapTuple tuple;
+ Form_pg_tablespace pg_tablespace_tuple;
+ Datum aclDatum;
+ bool isNull;
+ AclMode my_goptions;
+ AclMode this_privileges;
+ Acl *old_acl;
+ Acl *new_acl;
+ AclId grantorId;
+ AclId ownerId;
+ HeapTuple newtuple;
+ Datum values[Natts_pg_tablespace];
+ char nulls[Natts_pg_tablespace];
+ char replaces[Natts_pg_tablespace];
+
+ relation = heap_openr(TableSpaceRelationName, RowExclusiveLock);
+ ScanKeyInit(&entry[0],
+ Anum_pg_tablespace_spcname,
+ BTEqualStrategyNumber, F_NAMEEQ,
+ CStringGetDatum(spcname));
+ scan = heap_beginscan(relation, SnapshotNow, 1, entry);
+ tuple = heap_getnext(scan, ForwardScanDirection);
+ if (!HeapTupleIsValid(tuple))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT),
+ errmsg("tablespace \"%s\" does not exist", spcname)));
+ pg_tablespace_tuple = (Form_pg_tablespace) GETSTRUCT(tuple);
+
+ ownerId = pg_tablespace_tuple->spcowner;
+ grantorId = select_grantor(ownerId);
+
+ /*
+ * Must be owner or have some privilege on the object (per spec,
+ * any privilege will get you by here). The owner is always
+ * treated as having all grant options.
+ */
+ if (pg_tablespace_ownercheck(HeapTupleGetOid(tuple), GetUserId()))
+ my_goptions = ACL_ALL_RIGHTS_TABLESPACE;
+ else
+ {
+ AclMode my_rights;
+
+ my_rights = pg_tablespace_aclmask(HeapTupleGetOid(tuple),
+ GetUserId(),
+ ACL_ALL_RIGHTS_TABLESPACE | ACL_GRANT_OPTION_FOR(ACL_ALL_RIGHTS_TABLESPACE),
+ ACLMASK_ALL);
+ if (my_rights == ACL_NO_RIGHTS)
+ aclcheck_error(ACLCHECK_NO_PRIV, ACL_KIND_TABLESPACE,
+ spcname);
+ my_goptions = ACL_OPTION_TO_PRIVS(my_rights);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * Restrict the operation to what we can actually grant or revoke,
+ * and issue a warning if appropriate. (For REVOKE this isn't quite
+ * what the spec says to do: the spec seems to want a warning only
+ * if no privilege bits actually change in the ACL. In practice
+ * that behavior seems much too noisy, as well as inconsistent with
+ * the GRANT case.)
+ */
+ this_privileges = privileges & my_goptions;
+ if (stmt->is_grant)
+ {
+ if (this_privileges == 0)
+ ereport(WARNING,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_WARNING_PRIVILEGE_NOT_GRANTED),
+ errmsg("no privileges were granted")));
+ else if (!all_privs && this_privileges != privileges)
+ ereport(WARNING,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_WARNING_PRIVILEGE_NOT_GRANTED),
+ errmsg("not all privileges were granted")));
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if (this_privileges == 0)
+ ereport(WARNING,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_WARNING_PRIVILEGE_NOT_REVOKED),
+ errmsg("no privileges could be revoked")));
+ else if (!all_privs && this_privileges != privileges)
+ ereport(WARNING,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_WARNING_PRIVILEGE_NOT_REVOKED),
+ errmsg("not all privileges could be revoked")));
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * If there's no ACL, substitute the proper default.
+ */
+ aclDatum = heap_getattr(tuple, Anum_pg_tablespace_spcacl,
+ RelationGetDescr(relation), &isNull);
+ if (isNull)
+ old_acl = acldefault(ACL_OBJECT_TABLESPACE, ownerId);
+ else
+ /* get a detoasted copy of the ACL */
+ old_acl = DatumGetAclPCopy(aclDatum);
+
+ new_acl = merge_acl_with_grant(old_acl, stmt->is_grant,
+ stmt->grant_option, stmt->behavior,
+ stmt->grantees, this_privileges,
+ grantorId, ownerId);
+
+ /* finished building new ACL value, now insert it */
+ MemSet(values, 0, sizeof(values));
+ MemSet(nulls, ' ', sizeof(nulls));
+ MemSet(replaces, ' ', sizeof(replaces));
+
+ replaces[Anum_pg_tablespace_spcacl - 1] = 'r';
+ values[Anum_pg_tablespace_spcacl - 1] = PointerGetDatum(new_acl);
+
+ newtuple = heap_modifytuple(tuple, relation, values, nulls, replaces);
+
+ simple_heap_update(relation, &newtuple->t_self, newtuple);
+
+ /* keep the catalog indexes up to date */
+ CatalogUpdateIndexes(relation, newtuple);
+
+ pfree(new_acl);
+
+ heap_endscan(scan);
+ heap_close(relation, RowExclusiveLock);
+ }
+}
+
static const char *
privilege_to_string(AclMode privilege)
/* ACL_KIND_OPCLASS */
gettext_noop("permission denied for operator class %s"),
/* ACL_KIND_CONVERSION */
- gettext_noop("permission denied for conversion %s")
+ gettext_noop("permission denied for conversion %s"),
+ /* ACL_KIND_TABLESPACE */
+ gettext_noop("permission denied for tablespace %s")
};
static const char *const not_owner_msg[MAX_ACL_KIND] =
/* ACL_KIND_OPCLASS */
gettext_noop("must be owner of operator class %s"),
/* ACL_KIND_CONVERSION */
- gettext_noop("must be owner of conversion %s")
+ gettext_noop("must be owner of conversion %s"),
+ /* ACL_KIND_TABLESPACE */
+ gettext_noop("must be owner of tablespace %s")
};
return result;
}
+/*
+ * Exported routine for examining a user's privileges for a tablespace
+ */
+AclMode
+pg_tablespace_aclmask(Oid spc_oid, AclId userid,
+ AclMode mask, AclMaskHow how)
+{
+ AclMode result;
+ Relation pg_tablespace;
+ ScanKeyData entry[1];
+ HeapScanDesc scan;
+ HeapTuple tuple;
+ Datum aclDatum;
+ bool isNull;
+ Acl *acl;
+ AclId ownerId;
+
+ /*
+ * Only shared relations can be stored in global space; don't let
+ * even superusers override this
+ */
+ if (spc_oid == GLOBALTABLESPACE_OID && !IsBootstrapProcessingMode())
+ return 0;
+
+ /* Otherwise, superusers bypass all permission checking. */
+ if (superuser_arg(userid))
+ return mask;
+
+ /*
+ * Get the tablespace's ACL from pg_tablespace
+ *
+ * There's no syscache for pg_tablespace, so must look the hard way
+ */
+ pg_tablespace = heap_openr(TableSpaceRelationName, AccessShareLock);
+ ScanKeyInit(&entry[0],
+ ObjectIdAttributeNumber,
+ BTEqualStrategyNumber, F_OIDEQ,
+ ObjectIdGetDatum(spc_oid));
+ scan = heap_beginscan(pg_tablespace, SnapshotNow, 1, entry);
+ tuple = heap_getnext(scan, ForwardScanDirection);
+ if (!HeapTupleIsValid(tuple))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT),
+ errmsg("tablespace with OID %u does not exist", spc_oid)));
+
+ ownerId = ((Form_pg_tablespace) GETSTRUCT(tuple))->spcowner;
+
+ aclDatum = heap_getattr(tuple, Anum_pg_tablespace_spcacl,
+ RelationGetDescr(pg_tablespace), &isNull);
+
+ if (isNull)
+ {
+ /* No ACL, so build default ACL */
+ acl = acldefault(ACL_OBJECT_TABLESPACE, ownerId);
+ aclDatum = (Datum) 0;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* detoast ACL if necessary */
+ acl = DatumGetAclP(aclDatum);
+ }
+
+ result = aclmask(acl, userid, ownerId, mask, how);
+
+ /* if we have a detoasted copy, free it */
+ if (acl && (Pointer) acl != DatumGetPointer(aclDatum))
+ pfree(acl);
+
+ heap_endscan(scan);
+ heap_close(pg_tablespace, AccessShareLock);
+
+ return result;
+}
+
/*
* Exported routine for checking a user's access privileges to a table
return ACLCHECK_NO_PRIV;
}
+/*
+ * Exported routine for checking a user's access privileges to a tablespace
+ */
+AclResult
+pg_tablespace_aclcheck(Oid spc_oid, AclId userid, AclMode mode)
+{
+ if (pg_tablespace_aclmask(spc_oid, userid, mode, ACLMASK_ANY) != 0)
+ return ACLCHECK_OK;
+ else
+ return ACLCHECK_NO_PRIV;
+}
+
/*
* Ownership check for a relation (specified by OID).
return userid == owner_id;
}
+/*
+ * Ownership check for a tablespace (specified by OID).
+ */
+bool
+pg_tablespace_ownercheck(Oid spc_oid, AclId userid)
+{
+ Relation pg_tablespace;
+ ScanKeyData entry[1];
+ HeapScanDesc scan;
+ HeapTuple spctuple;
+ int32 spcowner;
+
+ /* Superusers bypass all permission checking. */
+ if (superuser_arg(userid))
+ return true;
+
+ /* There's no syscache for pg_tablespace, so must look the hard way */
+ pg_tablespace = heap_openr(TableSpaceRelationName, AccessShareLock);
+ ScanKeyInit(&entry[0],
+ ObjectIdAttributeNumber,
+ BTEqualStrategyNumber, F_OIDEQ,
+ ObjectIdGetDatum(spc_oid));
+ scan = heap_beginscan(pg_tablespace, SnapshotNow, 1, entry);
+
+ spctuple = heap_getnext(scan, ForwardScanDirection);
+
+ if (!HeapTupleIsValid(spctuple))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT),
+ errmsg("tablespace with OID %u does not exist", spc_oid)));
+
+ spcowner = ((Form_pg_tablespace) GETSTRUCT(spctuple))->spcowner;
+
+ heap_endscan(scan);
+ heap_close(pg_tablespace, AccessShareLock);
+
+ return userid == spcowner;
+}
+
/*
* Ownership check for an operator class (specified by OID).
*/
return userid == owner_id;
}
-
/*
- * Ownership check for database (specified as OID)
+ * Ownership check for a database (specified by OID).
*/
bool
pg_database_ownercheck(Oid db_oid, AclId userid)
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/catalog.c,v 1.51 2004/01/06 18:07:31 neilc Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/catalog.c,v 1.52 2004/06/18 06:13:19 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#include "catalog/catalog.h"
#include "catalog/catname.h"
#include "catalog/pg_namespace.h"
+#include "catalog/pg_tablespace.h"
#include "miscadmin.h"
+#define OIDCHARS 10 /* max chars printed by %u */
+
+
/*
* relpath - construct path to a relation's file
*
* Result is a palloc'd string.
*/
-
char *
relpath(RelFileNode rnode)
{
+ int pathlen;
char *path;
- if (rnode.tblNode == (Oid) 0) /* "global tablespace" */
+ if (rnode.spcNode == GLOBALTABLESPACE_OID)
{
/* Shared system relations live in {datadir}/global */
- path = (char *) palloc(strlen(DataDir) + 8 + sizeof(NameData) + 1);
- sprintf(path, "%s/global/%u", DataDir, rnode.relNode);
+ Assert(rnode.dbNode == 0);
+ pathlen = strlen(DataDir) + 8 + OIDCHARS + 1;
+ path = (char *) palloc(pathlen);
+ snprintf(path, pathlen, "%s/global/%u",
+ DataDir, rnode.relNode);
+ }
+ else if (rnode.spcNode == DEFAULTTABLESPACE_OID)
+ {
+ /* The default tablespace is {datadir}/base */
+ pathlen = strlen(DataDir) + 6 + OIDCHARS + 1 + OIDCHARS + 1;
+ path = (char *) palloc(pathlen);
+ snprintf(path, pathlen, "%s/base/%u/%u",
+ DataDir, rnode.dbNode, rnode.relNode);
}
else
{
- path = (char *) palloc(strlen(DataDir) + 6 + 2 * sizeof(NameData) + 3);
- sprintf(path, "%s/base/%u/%u", DataDir, rnode.tblNode, rnode.relNode);
+ /* All other tablespaces are accessed via symlinks */
+ pathlen = strlen(DataDir) + 16 + OIDCHARS + 1 + OIDCHARS + 1 + OIDCHARS + 1;
+ path = (char *) palloc(pathlen);
+ snprintf(path, pathlen, "%s/pg_tablespaces/%u/%u/%u",
+ DataDir, rnode.spcNode, rnode.dbNode, rnode.relNode);
}
return path;
}
* GetDatabasePath - construct path to a database dir
*
* Result is a palloc'd string.
+ *
+ * XXX this must agree with relpath()!
*/
-
char *
-GetDatabasePath(Oid tblNode)
+GetDatabasePath(Oid dbNode, Oid spcNode)
{
+ int pathlen;
char *path;
- if (tblNode == (Oid) 0) /* "global tablespace" */
+ if (spcNode == GLOBALTABLESPACE_OID)
{
/* Shared system relations live in {datadir}/global */
- path = (char *) palloc(strlen(DataDir) + 8);
- sprintf(path, "%s/global", DataDir);
+ Assert(dbNode == 0);
+ pathlen = strlen(DataDir) + 7 + 1;
+ path = (char *) palloc(pathlen);
+ snprintf(path, pathlen, "%s/global",
+ DataDir);
+ }
+ else if (spcNode == DEFAULTTABLESPACE_OID)
+ {
+ /* The default tablespace is {datadir}/base */
+ pathlen = strlen(DataDir) + 6 + OIDCHARS + 1;
+ path = (char *) palloc(pathlen);
+ snprintf(path, pathlen, "%s/base/%u",
+ DataDir, dbNode);
}
else
{
- path = (char *) palloc(strlen(DataDir) + 6 + sizeof(NameData) + 1);
- sprintf(path, "%s/base/%u", DataDir, tblNode);
+ /* All other tablespaces are accessed via symlinks */
+ pathlen = strlen(DataDir) + 16 + OIDCHARS + 1 + OIDCHARS + 1;
+ path = (char *) palloc(pathlen);
+ snprintf(path, pathlen, "%s/pg_tablespaces/%u/%u",
+ DataDir, spcNode, dbNode);
}
return path;
}
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/heap.c,v 1.270 2004/06/10 17:55:53 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/heap.c,v 1.271 2004/06/18 06:13:19 tgl Exp $
*
*
* INTERFACE ROUTINES
#include "catalog/pg_statistic.h"
#include "catalog/pg_type.h"
#include "commands/tablecmds.h"
+#include "commands/tablespace.h"
#include "commands/trigger.h"
#include "miscadmin.h"
#include "nodes/makefuncs.h"
Relation
heap_create(const char *relname,
Oid relnamespace,
+ Oid reltablespace,
TupleDesc tupDesc,
bool shared_relation,
bool storage_create,
bool allow_system_table_mods)
{
Oid relid;
- Oid dbid = shared_relation ? InvalidOid : MyDatabaseId;
bool nailme = false;
- RelFileNode rnode;
Relation rel;
/*
relid = RelOid_pg_group;
else if (strcmp(DatabaseRelationName, relname) == 0)
relid = RelOid_pg_database;
+ else if (strcmp(TableSpaceRelationName, relname) == 0)
+ relid = RelOid_pg_tablespace;
else
relid = newoid();
}
else
relid = newoid();
- /*
- * For now, the physical identifier of the relation is the same as the
- * logical identifier.
- */
- rnode.tblNode = dbid;
- rnode.relNode = relid;
-
/*
* build the relcache entry.
*/
rel = RelationBuildLocalRelation(relname,
relnamespace,
tupDesc,
- relid, dbid,
- rnode,
+ relid,
+ reltablespace,
+ shared_relation,
nailme);
/*
void
heap_storage_create(Relation rel)
{
+ /*
+ * We may be using the target table space for the first time in this
+ * database, so create a per-database subdirectory if needed.
+ *
+ * XXX it might be better to do this right in smgrcreate...
+ */
+ TablespaceCreateDbspace(rel->rd_node.spcNode, rel->rd_node.dbNode);
+ /*
+ * Now we can make the file.
+ */
Assert(rel->rd_smgr == NULL);
rel->rd_smgr = smgropen(rel->rd_node);
smgrcreate(rel->rd_smgr, rel->rd_istemp, false);
Oid
heap_create_with_catalog(const char *relname,
Oid relnamespace,
+ Oid reltablespace,
TupleDesc tupdesc,
char relkind,
bool shared_relation,
*/
new_rel_desc = heap_create(relname,
relnamespace,
+ reltablespace,
tupdesc,
shared_relation,
(relkind != RELKIND_VIEW &&
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/index.c,v 1.233 2004/05/31 19:24:05 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/index.c,v 1.234 2004/06/18 06:13:19 tgl Exp $
*
*
* INTERFACE ROUTINES
const char *indexRelationName,
IndexInfo *indexInfo,
Oid accessMethodObjectId,
+ Oid tableSpaceId,
Oid *classObjectId,
bool primary,
bool isconstraint,
*/
indexRelation = heap_create(indexRelationName,
namespaceId,
+ tableSpaceId,
indexTupDesc,
shared_relation,
true,
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/namespace.c,v 1.66 2004/05/28 16:17:14 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/namespace.c,v 1.67 2004/06/18 06:13:19 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* that access the temp namespace for my own backend skip
* permissions checks on it.
*/
- namespaceId = NamespaceCreate(namespaceName, BOOTSTRAP_USESYSID);
+ namespaceId = NamespaceCreate(namespaceName, BOOTSTRAP_USESYSID, 0);
/* Advance command counter to make namespace visible */
CommandCounterIncrement();
}
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_namespace.c,v 1.8 2003/11/29 19:51:46 pgsql Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_namespace.c,v 1.9 2004/06/18 06:13:19 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* ---------------
*/
Oid
-NamespaceCreate(const char *nspName, int32 ownerSysId)
+NamespaceCreate(const char *nspName, int32 ownerSysId, Oid nspTablespace)
{
Relation nspdesc;
HeapTuple tup;
namestrcpy(&nname, nspName);
values[Anum_pg_namespace_nspname - 1] = NameGetDatum(&nname);
values[Anum_pg_namespace_nspowner - 1] = Int32GetDatum(ownerSysId);
+ values[Anum_pg_namespace_nsptablespace - 1] = Int32GetDatum(nspTablespace);
nulls[Anum_pg_namespace_nspacl - 1] = 'n';
nspdesc = heap_openr(NamespaceRelationName, RowExclusiveLock);
# Makefile for backend/commands
#
# IDENTIFICATION
-# $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/Makefile,v 1.33 2003/11/29 19:51:47 pgsql Exp $
+# $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/Makefile,v 1.34 2004/06/18 06:13:22 tgl Exp $
#
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dbcommands.o define.o explain.o functioncmds.o \
indexcmds.o lockcmds.o operatorcmds.o opclasscmds.o \
portalcmds.o prepare.o proclang.o \
- schemacmds.o sequence.o tablecmds.o trigger.o typecmds.o user.o \
- vacuum.o vacuumlazy.o variable.o view.o
+ schemacmds.o sequence.o tablecmds.o tablespace.o trigger.o \
+ typecmds.o user.o vacuum.o vacuumlazy.o variable.o view.o
all: SUBSYS.o
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/cluster.c,v 1.125 2004/05/31 19:24:05 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/cluster.c,v 1.126 2004/06/18 06:13:22 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
OIDNewHeap = heap_create_with_catalog(NewName,
RelationGetNamespace(OldHeap),
+ OldHeap->rd_rel->reltablespace,
tupdesc,
OldHeap->rd_rel->relkind,
OldHeap->rd_rel->relisshared,
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/dbcommands.c,v 1.135 2004/06/10 22:26:18 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/dbcommands.c,v 1.136 2004/06/18 06:13:22 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#include "postgres.h"
-#include <errno.h>
#include <fcntl.h>
#include <unistd.h>
#include <sys/stat.h>
#include "catalog/catalog.h"
#include "catalog/pg_database.h"
#include "catalog/pg_shadow.h"
+#include "catalog/pg_tablespace.h"
#include "catalog/indexing.h"
#include "commands/comment.h"
#include "commands/dbcommands.h"
+#include "commands/tablespace.h"
+#include "mb/pg_wchar.h"
#include "miscadmin.h"
#include "storage/fd.h"
#include "storage/freespace.h"
#include "utils/lsyscache.h"
#include "utils/syscache.h"
-#include "mb/pg_wchar.h" /* encoding check */
-
/* non-export function prototypes */
static bool get_db_info(const char *name, Oid *dbIdP, int4 *ownerIdP,
int *encodingP, bool *dbIsTemplateP, Oid *dbLastSysOidP,
TransactionId *dbVacuumXidP, TransactionId *dbFrozenXidP,
- char *dbpath);
+ Oid *dbTablespace);
static bool have_createdb_privilege(void);
-static char *resolve_alt_dbpath(const char *dbpath, Oid dboid);
-static bool remove_dbdirs(const char *real_loc, const char *altloc);
+static void remove_dbtablespaces(Oid db_id);
+
/*
* CREATE DATABASE
*/
-
void
createdb(const CreatedbStmt *stmt)
{
- char *nominal_loc;
- char *alt_loc;
- char *target_dir;
- char src_loc[MAXPGPATH];
-#ifndef WIN32
- char buf[2 * MAXPGPATH + 100];
-#endif
+ HeapScanDesc scan;
+ Relation rel;
Oid src_dboid;
AclId src_owner;
int src_encoding;
Oid src_lastsysoid;
TransactionId src_vacuumxid;
TransactionId src_frozenxid;
- char src_dbpath[MAXPGPATH];
+ Oid src_deftablespace;
+ Oid dst_deftablespace;
Relation pg_database_rel;
HeapTuple tuple;
TupleDesc pg_database_dsc;
Oid dboid;
AclId datdba;
ListCell *option;
+ DefElem *dtablespacename = NULL;
DefElem *downer = NULL;
- DefElem *dpath = NULL;
DefElem *dtemplate = NULL;
DefElem *dencoding = NULL;
char *dbname = stmt->dbname;
char *dbowner = NULL;
- char *dbpath = NULL;
char *dbtemplate = NULL;
int encoding = -1;
+#ifndef WIN32
+ char buf[2 * MAXPGPATH + 100];
+#endif
+
+ /* don't call this in a transaction block */
+ PreventTransactionChain((void *) stmt, "CREATE DATABASE");
/* Extract options from the statement node tree */
foreach(option, stmt->options)
{
DefElem *defel = (DefElem *) lfirst(option);
- if (strcmp(defel->defname, "owner") == 0)
+ if (strcmp(defel->defname, "tablespace") == 0)
{
- if (downer)
+ if (dtablespacename)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
errmsg("conflicting or redundant options")));
- downer = defel;
+ dtablespacename = defel;
}
- else if (strcmp(defel->defname, "location") == 0)
+ else if (strcmp(defel->defname, "owner") == 0)
{
- if (dpath)
+ if (downer)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
errmsg("conflicting or redundant options")));
- dpath = defel;
+ downer = defel;
}
else if (strcmp(defel->defname, "template") == 0)
{
errmsg("conflicting or redundant options")));
dencoding = defel;
}
+ else if (strcmp(defel->defname, "location") == 0)
+ {
+ ereport(WARNING,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED),
+ errmsg("LOCATION is not supported anymore"),
+ errhint("Consider using tablespaces instead.")));
+ }
else
elog(ERROR, "option \"%s\" not recognized",
defel->defname);
if (downer && downer->arg)
dbowner = strVal(downer->arg);
- if (dpath && dpath->arg)
- dbpath = strVal(dpath->arg);
if (dtemplate && dtemplate->arg)
dbtemplate = strVal(dtemplate->arg);
if (dencoding && dencoding->arg)
errmsg("must be superuser to create database for another user")));
}
- /* don't call this in a transaction block */
- PreventTransactionChain((void *) stmt, "CREATE DATABASE");
-
- /* alternate location requires symlinks */
-#ifndef HAVE_SYMLINK
- if (dbpath != NULL)
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED),
- errmsg("cannot use an alternative location on this platform")));
-#endif
-
/*
* Check for db name conflict. There is a race condition here, since
* another backend could create the same DB name before we commit.
if (!get_db_info(dbtemplate, &src_dboid, &src_owner, &src_encoding,
&src_istemplate, &src_lastsysoid,
- &src_vacuumxid, &src_frozenxid,
- src_dbpath))
+ &src_vacuumxid, &src_frozenxid, &src_deftablespace))
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_DATABASE),
errmsg("template database \"%s\" does not exist", dbtemplate)));
dbtemplate)));
}
- /*
- * Determine physical path of source database
- */
- alt_loc = resolve_alt_dbpath(src_dbpath, src_dboid);
- if (!alt_loc)
- alt_loc = GetDatabasePath(src_dboid);
- strcpy(src_loc, alt_loc);
-
/*
* The source DB can't have any active backends, except this one
* (exception is to allow CREATE DB while connected to template1).
(errcode(ERRCODE_WRONG_OBJECT_TYPE),
errmsg("invalid server encoding %d", encoding)));
+ /* Resolve default tablespace for new database */
+ if (dtablespacename && dtablespacename->arg)
+ {
+ char *tablespacename;
+ AclResult aclresult;
+
+ tablespacename = strVal(dtablespacename->arg);
+ dst_deftablespace = get_tablespace_oid(tablespacename);
+ if (!OidIsValid(dst_deftablespace))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT),
+ errmsg("tablespace \"%s\" does not exist",
+ tablespacename)));
+ /* check permissions */
+ aclresult = pg_tablespace_aclcheck(dst_deftablespace, GetUserId(),
+ ACL_CREATE);
+ if (aclresult != ACLCHECK_OK)
+ aclcheck_error(aclresult, ACL_KIND_TABLESPACE,
+ tablespacename);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Use template database's default tablespace */
+ dst_deftablespace = src_deftablespace;
+ /* Note there is no additional permission check in this path */
+ }
+
/*
* Preassign OID for pg_database tuple, so that we can compute db
* path.
*/
dboid = newoid();
- /*
- * Compute nominal location (where we will try to access the
- * database), and resolve alternate physical location if one is
- * specified.
- *
- * If an alternate location is specified but is the same as the normal
- * path, just drop the alternate-location spec (this seems friendlier
- * than erroring out). We must test this case to avoid creating a
- * circular symlink below.
- */
- nominal_loc = GetDatabasePath(dboid);
- alt_loc = resolve_alt_dbpath(dbpath, dboid);
-
- if (alt_loc && strcmp(alt_loc, nominal_loc) == 0)
- {
- alt_loc = NULL;
- dbpath = NULL;
- }
-
- if (strchr(nominal_loc, '\''))
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_NAME),
- errmsg("database path may not contain single quotes")));
- if (alt_loc && strchr(alt_loc, '\''))
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_NAME),
- errmsg("database path may not contain single quotes")));
- if (strchr(src_loc, '\''))
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_NAME),
- errmsg("database path may not contain single quotes")));
- /* ... otherwise we'd be open to shell exploits below */
-
/*
* Force dirty buffers out to disk, to ensure source database is
* up-to-date for the copy. (We really only need to flush buffers for
/*
* Close virtual file descriptors so the kernel has more available for
- * the mkdir() and system() calls below.
+ * the system() calls below.
*/
closeAllVfds();
/*
- * Check we can create the target directory --- but then remove it
- * because we rely on cp(1) to create it for real.
+ * Iterate through all tablespaces of the template database, and
+ * copy each one to the new database.
+ *
+ * If we are trying to change the default tablespace of the template,
+ * we require that the template not have any files in the new default
+ * tablespace. This avoids the need to merge two subdirectories.
+ * This could probably be improved later.
*/
- target_dir = alt_loc ? alt_loc : nominal_loc;
+ rel = heap_openr(TableSpaceRelationName, AccessShareLock);
+ scan = heap_beginscan(rel, SnapshotNow, 0, NULL);
+ while ((tuple = heap_getnext(scan, ForwardScanDirection)) != NULL)
+ {
+ Oid srctablespace = HeapTupleGetOid(tuple);
+ Oid dsttablespace;
+ char *srcpath;
+ char *dstpath;
+ struct stat st;
- if (mkdir(target_dir, S_IRWXU) != 0)
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode_for_file_access(),
- errmsg("could not create database directory \"%s\": %m",
- target_dir)));
- if (rmdir(target_dir) != 0)
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode_for_file_access(),
- errmsg("could not remove temporary directory \"%s\": %m",
- target_dir)));
+ /* No need to copy global tablespace */
+ if (srctablespace == GLOBALTABLESPACE_OID)
+ continue;
- /* Make the symlink, if needed */
- if (alt_loc)
- {
-#ifdef HAVE_SYMLINK /* already throws error above */
- if (symlink(alt_loc, nominal_loc) != 0)
-#endif
+ srcpath = GetDatabasePath(src_dboid, srctablespace);
+
+ if (stat(srcpath, &st) < 0 || !S_ISDIR(st.st_mode))
+ {
+ /* Assume we can ignore it */
+ pfree(srcpath);
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ if (srctablespace == src_deftablespace)
+ dsttablespace = dst_deftablespace;
+ else
+ dsttablespace = srctablespace;
+
+ dstpath = GetDatabasePath(dboid, dsttablespace);
+
+ if (stat(dstpath, &st) == 0 || errno != ENOENT)
+ {
+ remove_dbtablespaces(dboid);
ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode_for_file_access(),
- errmsg("could not link file \"%s\" to \"%s\": %m",
- nominal_loc, alt_loc)));
- }
+ (errmsg("could not initialize database directory"),
+ errdetail("Directory \"%s\" already exists.", dstpath)));
+ }
- /*
- * Copy the template database to the new location
- *
- * XXX use of cp really makes this code pretty grotty, particularly
- * with respect to lack of ability to report errors well. Someday
- * rewrite to do it for ourselves.
- */
#ifndef WIN32
- /* We might need to use cp -R one day for portability */
- snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf), "cp -r '%s' '%s'", src_loc, target_dir);
- if (system(buf) != 0)
- {
- if (remove_dbdirs(nominal_loc, alt_loc))
+ /*
+ * Copy this subdirectory to the new location
+ *
+ * XXX use of cp really makes this code pretty grotty, particularly
+ * with respect to lack of ability to report errors well. Someday
+ * rewrite to do it for ourselves.
+ */
+
+ /* We might need to use cp -R one day for portability */
+ snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf), "cp -r '%s' '%s'",
+ srcpath, dstpath);
+ if (system(buf) != 0)
+ {
+ remove_dbtablespaces(dboid);
ereport(ERROR,
(errmsg("could not initialize database directory"),
errdetail("Failing system command was: %s", buf),
errhint("Look in the postmaster's stderr log for more information.")));
- else
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errmsg("could not initialize database directory; delete failed as well"),
- errdetail("Failing system command was: %s", buf),
- errhint("Look in the postmaster's stderr log for more information.")));
- }
+ }
#else /* WIN32 */
- if (copydir(src_loc, target_dir) != 0)
- {
- /* copydir should already have given details of its troubles */
- if (remove_dbdirs(nominal_loc, alt_loc))
+ if (copydir(srcpath, dstpath) != 0)
+ {
+ /* copydir should already have given details of its troubles */
+ remove_dbtablespaces(dboid);
ereport(ERROR,
(errmsg("could not initialize database directory")));
- else
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errmsg("could not initialize database directory; delete failed as well")));
- }
+ }
#endif /* WIN32 */
+ }
+ heap_endscan(scan);
+ heap_close(rel, AccessShareLock);
/*
* Now OK to grab exclusive lock on pg_database.
{
/* Don't hold lock while doing recursive remove */
heap_close(pg_database_rel, AccessExclusiveLock);
- remove_dbdirs(nominal_loc, alt_loc);
+ remove_dbtablespaces(dboid);
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_DUPLICATE_DATABASE),
errmsg("database \"%s\" already exists", dbname)));
new_record[Anum_pg_database_datlastsysoid - 1] = ObjectIdGetDatum(src_lastsysoid);
new_record[Anum_pg_database_datvacuumxid - 1] = TransactionIdGetDatum(src_vacuumxid);
new_record[Anum_pg_database_datfrozenxid - 1] = TransactionIdGetDatum(src_frozenxid);
- /* do not set datpath to null, GetRawDatabaseInfo won't cope */
- new_record[Anum_pg_database_datpath - 1] =
- DirectFunctionCall1(textin, CStringGetDatum(dbpath ? dbpath : ""));
+ new_record[Anum_pg_database_dattablespace - 1] = ObjectIdGetDatum(dst_deftablespace);
/*
* We deliberately set datconfig and datacl to defaults (NULL), rather
int4 db_owner;
bool db_istemplate;
Oid db_id;
- char *alt_loc;
- char *nominal_loc;
- char dbpath[MAXPGPATH];
Relation pgdbrel;
SysScanDesc pgdbscan;
ScanKeyData key;
HeapTuple tup;
+ PreventTransactionChain((void *) dbname, "DROP DATABASE");
+
AssertArg(dbname);
if (strcmp(dbname, get_database_name(MyDatabaseId)) == 0)
(errcode(ERRCODE_OBJECT_IN_USE),
errmsg("cannot drop the currently open database")));
- PreventTransactionChain((void *) dbname, "DROP DATABASE");
-
/*
* Obtain exclusive lock on pg_database. We need this to ensure that
* no new backend starts up in the target database while we are
pgdbrel = heap_openr(DatabaseRelationName, AccessExclusiveLock);
if (!get_db_info(dbname, &db_id, &db_owner, NULL,
- &db_istemplate, NULL, NULL, NULL, dbpath))
+ &db_istemplate, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL))
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_DATABASE),
errmsg("database \"%s\" does not exist", dbname)));
(errcode(ERRCODE_WRONG_OBJECT_TYPE),
errmsg("cannot drop a template database")));
- nominal_loc = GetDatabasePath(db_id);
- alt_loc = resolve_alt_dbpath(dbpath, db_id);
-
/*
* Check for active backends in the target database.
*/
FreeSpaceMapForgetDatabase(db_id);
/*
- * Remove the database's subdirectory and everything in it.
+ * Remove all tablespace subdirs belonging to the database.
*/
- remove_dbdirs(nominal_loc, alt_loc);
+ remove_dbtablespaces(db_id);
/*
* Force dirty buffers out to disk, so that newly-connecting backends
get_db_info(const char *name, Oid *dbIdP, int4 *ownerIdP,
int *encodingP, bool *dbIsTemplateP, Oid *dbLastSysOidP,
TransactionId *dbVacuumXidP, TransactionId *dbFrozenXidP,
- char *dbpath)
+ Oid *dbTablespace)
{
Relation relation;
ScanKeyData scanKey;
/* limit of frozen XIDs */
if (dbFrozenXidP)
*dbFrozenXidP = dbform->datfrozenxid;
- /* database path (as registered in pg_database) */
- if (dbpath)
- {
- Datum datum;
- bool isnull;
-
- datum = heap_getattr(tuple,
- Anum_pg_database_datpath,
- RelationGetDescr(relation),
- &isnull);
- if (!isnull)
- {
- text *pathtext = DatumGetTextP(datum);
- int pathlen = VARSIZE(pathtext) - VARHDRSZ;
-
- Assert(pathlen >= 0 && pathlen < MAXPGPATH);
- strncpy(dbpath, VARDATA(pathtext), pathlen);
- *(dbpath + pathlen) = '\0';
- }
- else
- strcpy(dbpath, "");
- }
+ /* default tablespace for this database */
+ if (dbTablespace)
+ *dbTablespace = dbform->dattablespace;
}
systable_endscan(scan);
return retval;
}
-
-static char *
-resolve_alt_dbpath(const char *dbpath, Oid dboid)
+/*
+ * Remove tablespace directories
+ *
+ * We don't know what tablespaces db_id is using, so iterate through all
+ * tablespaces removing <tablespace>/db_id
+ */
+static void
+remove_dbtablespaces(Oid db_id)
{
- const char *prefix;
- char *ret;
- size_t len;
-
- if (dbpath == NULL || dbpath[0] == '\0')
- return NULL;
-
- if (first_dir_separator(dbpath))
- {
- if (!is_absolute_path(dbpath))
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED),
- errmsg("relative paths are not allowed as database locations")));
-#ifndef ALLOW_ABSOLUTE_DBPATHS
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE),
- errmsg("absolute paths are not allowed as database locations")));
-#endif
- prefix = dbpath;
- }
- else
+ Relation rel;
+ HeapScanDesc scan;
+ HeapTuple tuple;
+ char buf[MAXPGPATH + 100];
+
+ rel = heap_openr(TableSpaceRelationName, AccessShareLock);
+ scan = heap_beginscan(rel, SnapshotNow, 0, NULL);
+ while ((tuple = heap_getnext(scan, ForwardScanDirection)) != NULL)
{
- /* must be environment variable */
- char *var = getenv(dbpath);
-
- if (!var)
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT),
- errmsg("postmaster environment variable \"%s\" not found",
- dbpath)));
- if (!is_absolute_path(var))
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_NAME),
- errmsg("postmaster environment variable \"%s\" must be absolute path",
- dbpath)));
- prefix = var;
- }
+ Oid dsttablespace = HeapTupleGetOid(tuple);
+ char *dstpath;
+ struct stat st;
- len = strlen(prefix) + 6 + sizeof(Oid) * 8 + 1;
- if (len >= MAXPGPATH - 100)
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_NAME),
- errmsg("alternative path is too long")));
+ /* Don't mess with the global tablespace */
+ if (dsttablespace == GLOBALTABLESPACE_OID)
+ continue;
- ret = palloc(len);
- snprintf(ret, len, "%s/base/%u", prefix, dboid);
+ dstpath = GetDatabasePath(db_id, dsttablespace);
- return ret;
-}
-
-
-static bool
-remove_dbdirs(const char *nominal_loc, const char *alt_loc)
-{
- const char *target_dir;
- char buf[MAXPGPATH + 100];
- bool success = true;
-
- target_dir = alt_loc ? alt_loc : nominal_loc;
-
- /*
- * Close virtual file descriptors so the kernel has more available for
- * the system() call below.
- */
- closeAllVfds();
-
- if (alt_loc)
- {
- /* remove symlink */
- if (unlink(nominal_loc) != 0)
+ if (stat(dstpath, &st) < 0 || !S_ISDIR(st.st_mode))
{
- ereport(WARNING,
- (errcode_for_file_access(),
- errmsg("could not remove file \"%s\": %m", nominal_loc)));
- success = false;
+ /* Assume we can ignore it */
+ pfree(dstpath);
+ continue;
}
- }
#ifndef WIN32
- snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf), "rm -rf '%s'", target_dir);
+ snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf), "rm -rf '%s'", dstpath);
#else
- snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf), "rmdir /s /q \"%s\"", target_dir);
+ snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf), "rmdir /s /q \"%s\"", dstpath);
#endif
-
- if (system(buf) != 0)
- {
- ereport(WARNING,
+ if (system(buf) != 0)
+ {
+ ereport(WARNING,
(errmsg("could not remove database directory \"%s\"",
- target_dir),
+ dstpath),
errdetail("Failing system command was: %s", buf),
errhint("Look in the postmaster's stderr log for more information.")));
- success = false;
+ }
+
+ pfree(dstpath);
}
- return success;
+ heap_endscan(scan);
+ heap_close(rel, AccessShareLock);
}
/*
* get_database_name - given a database OID, look up the name
*
- * Returns InvalidOid if database name not found.
+ * Returns a palloc'd string, or NULL if no such database.
*
* This is not actually used in this file, but is exported for use elsewhere.
*/
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/indexcmds.c,v 1.121 2004/06/10 17:55:56 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/indexcmds.c,v 1.122 2004/06/18 06:13:23 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#include "commands/dbcommands.h"
#include "commands/defrem.h"
#include "commands/tablecmds.h"
+#include "commands/tablespace.h"
#include "executor/executor.h"
#include "mb/pg_wchar.h"
#include "miscadmin.h"
* 'indexRelationName': the name for the new index, or NULL to indicate
* that a nonconflicting default name should be picked.
* 'accessMethodName': name of the AM to use.
+ * 'tableSpaceName': name of the tablespace to create the index in.
+ * NULL specifies using the same tablespace as the parent relation.
* 'attributeList': a list of IndexElem specifying columns and expressions
* to index on.
* 'predicate': the partial-index condition, or NULL if none.
DefineIndex(RangeVar *heapRelation,
char *indexRelationName,
char *accessMethodName,
+ char *tableSpaceName,
List *attributeList,
Expr *predicate,
List *rangetable,
Oid accessMethodId;
Oid relationId;
Oid namespaceId;
+ Oid tablespaceId;
Relation rel;
HeapTuple tuple;
Form_pg_am accessMethodForm;
get_namespace_name(namespaceId));
}
+ /* Determine tablespace to use */
+ if (tableSpaceName)
+ {
+ AclResult aclresult;
+
+ tablespaceId = get_tablespace_oid(tableSpaceName);
+ if (!OidIsValid(tablespaceId))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT),
+ errmsg("tablespace \"%s\" does not exist",
+ tableSpaceName)));
+ /* check permissions */
+ aclresult = pg_tablespace_aclcheck(tablespaceId, GetUserId(),
+ ACL_CREATE);
+ if (aclresult != ACLCHECK_OK)
+ aclcheck_error(aclresult, ACL_KIND_TABLESPACE,
+ tableSpaceName);
+ } else {
+ /* Use the parent rel's tablespace */
+ tablespaceId = get_rel_tablespace(relationId);
+ /* Note there is no additional permission check in this path */
+ }
+
/*
* Select name for index if caller didn't specify
*/
indexRelationName, RelationGetRelationName(rel))));
index_create(relationId, indexRelationName,
- indexInfo, accessMethodId, classObjectId,
+ indexInfo, accessMethodId, tablespaceId, classObjectId,
primary, isconstraint,
allowSystemTableMods, skip_build);
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/schemacmds.c,v 1.18 2004/05/26 04:41:11 neilc Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/schemacmds.c,v 1.19 2004/06/18 06:13:23 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#include "catalog/pg_namespace.h"
#include "commands/dbcommands.h"
#include "commands/schemacmds.h"
+#include "commands/tablespace.h"
#include "miscadmin.h"
#include "parser/analyze.h"
#include "tcop/utility.h"
const char *schemaName = stmt->schemaname;
const char *authId = stmt->authid;
Oid namespaceId;
+ Oid tablespaceId;
List *parsetree_list;
ListCell *parsetree_item;
const char *owner_name;
errmsg("unacceptable schema name \"%s\"", schemaName),
errdetail("The prefix \"pg_\" is reserved for system schemas.")));
+ /*
+ * Select default tablespace for schema. If not given, use zero
+ * which implies the database's default tablespace.
+ */
+ if (stmt->tablespacename)
+ {
+ AclResult aclresult;
+
+ tablespaceId = get_tablespace_oid(stmt->tablespacename);
+ if (!OidIsValid(tablespaceId))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT),
+ errmsg("tablespace \"%s\" does not exist",
+ stmt->tablespacename)));
+ /* check permissions */
+ aclresult = pg_tablespace_aclcheck(tablespaceId, GetUserId(),
+ ACL_CREATE);
+ if (aclresult != ACLCHECK_OK)
+ aclcheck_error(aclresult, ACL_KIND_TABLESPACE,
+ stmt->tablespacename);
+ } else {
+ tablespaceId = InvalidOid;
+ /* note there is no permission check in this path */
+ }
+
/* Create the schema's namespace */
- namespaceId = NamespaceCreate(schemaName, owner_userid);
+ namespaceId = NamespaceCreate(schemaName, owner_userid, tablespaceId);
/* Advance cmd counter to make the namespace visible */
CommandCounterIncrement();
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/sequence.c,v 1.111 2004/05/26 04:41:11 neilc Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/sequence.c,v 1.112 2004/06/18 06:13:23 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
stmt->constraints = NIL;
stmt->hasoids = MUST_NOT_HAVE_OIDS;
stmt->oncommit = ONCOMMIT_NOOP;
+ stmt->tablespacename = seq->tablespacename;
seqoid = DefineRelation(stmt, RELKIND_SEQUENCE);
buffer = XLogReadBuffer(true, reln, 0);
if (!BufferIsValid(buffer))
- elog(PANIC, "seq_redo: can't read block of %u/%u",
- xlrec->node.tblNode, xlrec->node.relNode);
+ elog(PANIC, "seq_redo: can't read block 0 of rel %u/%u/%u",
+ xlrec->node.spcNode, xlrec->node.dbNode, xlrec->node.relNode);
page = (Page) BufferGetPage(buffer);
return;
}
- sprintf(buf + strlen(buf), "node %u/%u",
- xlrec->node.tblNode, xlrec->node.relNode);
+ sprintf(buf + strlen(buf), "rel %u/%u/%u",
+ xlrec->node.spcNode, xlrec->node.dbNode, xlrec->node.relNode);
}
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/tablecmds.c,v 1.115 2004/06/10 18:34:45 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/tablecmds.c,v 1.116 2004/06/18 06:13:23 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#include "commands/cluster.h"
#include "commands/defrem.h"
#include "commands/tablecmds.h"
+#include "commands/tablespace.h"
#include "commands/trigger.h"
#include "executor/executor.h"
#include "lib/stringinfo.h"
Oid namespaceId;
List *schema = stmt->tableElts;
Oid relationId;
+ Oid tablespaceId;
Relation rel;
TupleDesc descriptor;
List *inheritOids;
get_namespace_name(namespaceId));
}
+ /*
+ * Select tablespace to use. If not specified, use containing schema's
+ * default tablespace (which may in turn default to database's default).
+ */
+ if (stmt->tablespacename)
+ {
+ AclResult aclresult;
+
+ tablespaceId = get_tablespace_oid(stmt->tablespacename);
+ if (!OidIsValid(tablespaceId))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT),
+ errmsg("tablespace \"%s\" does not exist",
+ stmt->tablespacename)));
+ /* check permissions */
+ aclresult = pg_tablespace_aclcheck(tablespaceId, GetUserId(),
+ ACL_CREATE);
+ if (aclresult != ACLCHECK_OK)
+ aclcheck_error(aclresult, ACL_KIND_TABLESPACE,
+ stmt->tablespacename);
+ } else {
+ tablespaceId = get_namespace_tablespace(namespaceId);
+ /* note no permission check on tablespace in this case */
+ }
+
/*
* Look up inheritance ancestors and generate relation schema,
* including inherited attributes.
relationId = heap_create_with_catalog(relname,
namespaceId,
+ tablespaceId,
descriptor,
relkind,
false,
/*
* ATPrepCmd
*
- * Traffic cop for ALTER TABLE Phase 1 operations, including simple
+ * Traffic cop for ALTER TABLE Phase 1 operations, including simple
* recursion and permission checks.
*
* Caller must have acquired AccessExclusiveLock on relation already.
}
-/*
+/*
* ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN
*
* Adds an additional attribute to a relation making the assumption that
DefineIndex(stmt->relation, /* relation */
stmt->idxname, /* index name */
stmt->accessMethod, /* am name */
+ stmt->tableSpace,
stmt->indexParams, /* parameters */
(Expr *) stmt->whereClause,
stmt->rangetable,
list_make1(constr));
/* Add each constraint to Phase 3's queue */
foreach(lcon, newcons)
- {
+ {
CookedConstraint *ccon = (CookedConstraint *) lfirst(lcon);
NewConstraint *newcon;
int16 fkattnum[INDEX_MAX_KEYS];
Oid pktypoid[INDEX_MAX_KEYS];
Oid fktypoid[INDEX_MAX_KEYS];
- Oid opclasses[INDEX_MAX_KEYS];
+ Oid opclasses[INDEX_MAX_KEYS];
int i;
int numfks,
numpks;
* will be incurred to check FK validity.
*/
if (!op_in_opclass(oprid(o), opclasses[i]))
- ereport(WARNING,
+ ereport(WARNING,
(errmsg("foreign key constraint \"%s\" "
"will require costly sequential scans",
fkconstraint->constr_name),
/*
* Add a work queue item to make ATRewriteTable update the column
* contents.
- */
+ */
newval = (NewColumnValue *) palloc0(sizeof(NewColumnValue));
newval->attnum = attnum;
newval->expr = (Expr *) transform;
*/
toast_relid = heap_create_with_catalog(toast_relname,
PG_TOAST_NAMESPACE,
+ rel->rd_rel->reltablespace,
tupdesc,
RELKIND_TOASTVALUE,
shared_relation,
classObjectId[1] = INT4_BTREE_OPS_OID;
toast_idxid = index_create(toast_relid, toast_idxname, indexInfo,
- BTREE_AM_OID, classObjectId,
+ BTREE_AM_OID,
+ rel->rd_rel->reltablespace,
+ classObjectId,
true, false, true, false);
/*
--- /dev/null
+/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * tablespace.c
+ * Commands to manipulate table spaces
+ *
+ *
+ * Tablespaces in PostgreSQL are designed to allow users to determine
+ * where the data file(s) for a given database object reside on the file
+ * system.
+ *
+ * A tablespace represents a directory on the file system. At tablespace
+ * creation time, the directory must be empty. To simplify things and
+ * remove the possibility of having file name conflicts, we isolate
+ * files within a tablespace into database-specific subdirectories.
+ *
+ * To support file access via the information given in RelFileNode, we
+ * maintain a symbolic-link map in $PGDATA/pg_tablespaces. The symlinks are
+ * named by tablespace OIDs and point to the actual tablespace directories.
+ * Thus the full path to an arbitrary file is
+ * $PGDATA/pg_tablespaces/spcoid/dboid/relfilenode
+ *
+ * There are two tablespaces created at initdb time: global (for shared
+ * tables) and default (for everything else). For backwards compatibility
+ * and to remain functional on platforms without symlinks, these tablespaces
+ * are accessed specially: they are respectively
+ * $PGDATA/global/relfilenode
+ * $PGDATA/base/dboid/relfilenode
+ *
+ * The implementation is designed to be backwards compatible. For this reason
+ * (and also as a feature unto itself) when a user creates an object without
+ * specifying a tablespace, we look at the object's parent and place
+ * the object in the parent's tablespace. The hierarchy is as follows:
+ * database > schema > table > index
+ *
+ * To allow CREATE DATABASE to give a new database a default tablespace
+ * that's different from the template database's default, we make the
+ * provision that a zero in pg_class.reltablespace means the database's
+ * default tablespace. Without this, CREATE DATABASE would have to go in
+ * and munge the system catalogs of the new database. This special meaning
+ * of zero also applies in pg_namespace.nsptablespace.
+ *
+ *
+ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2004, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
+ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
+ *
+ *
+ * IDENTIFICATION
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/tablespace.c,v 1.1 2004/06/18 06:13:23 tgl Exp $
+ *
+ *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+#include "postgres.h"
+
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <dirent.h>
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+
+#include "access/heapam.h"
+#include "catalog/catalog.h"
+#include "catalog/catname.h"
+#include "catalog/indexing.h"
+#include "catalog/pg_namespace.h"
+#include "catalog/pg_tablespace.h"
+#include "commands/tablespace.h"
+#include "miscadmin.h"
+#include "storage/fd.h"
+#include "storage/smgr.h"
+#include "utils/acl.h"
+#include "utils/builtins.h"
+#include "utils/fmgroids.h"
+#include "utils/lsyscache.h"
+#include "utils/syscache.h"
+
+
+static void set_short_version(const char *path);
+static bool directory_is_empty(const char *path);
+
+
+/*
+ * Each database using a table space is isolated into its own name space
+ * by a subdirectory named for the database OID. On first creation of an
+ * object in the tablespace, create the subdirectory. If the subdirectory
+ * already exists, just fall through quietly.
+ *
+ * If tablespaces are not supported, this is just a no-op; CREATE DATABASE
+ * is expected to create the default subdirectory for the database.
+ */
+void
+TablespaceCreateDbspace(Oid spcNode, Oid dbNode)
+{
+#ifdef HAVE_SYMLINK
+ struct stat st;
+ char *dir;
+
+ /*
+ * The global tablespace doesn't have per-database subdirectories,
+ * so nothing to do for it.
+ */
+ if (spcNode == GLOBALTABLESPACE_OID)
+ return;
+
+ Assert(OidIsValid(spcNode));
+ Assert(OidIsValid(dbNode));
+
+ dir = GetDatabasePath(dbNode, spcNode);
+
+ if (stat(dir, &st) < 0)
+ {
+ if (errno == ENOENT)
+ {
+ /*
+ * Acquire ExclusiveLock on pg_tablespace to ensure that no
+ * DROP TABLESPACE or TablespaceCreateDbspace is running
+ * concurrently. Simple reads from pg_tablespace are OK.
+ */
+ Relation rel;
+
+ rel = heap_openr(TableSpaceRelationName, ExclusiveLock);
+
+ /*
+ * Recheck to see if someone created the directory while
+ * we were waiting for lock.
+ */
+ if (stat(dir, &st) == 0 && S_ISDIR(st.st_mode))
+ {
+ /* need not do anything */
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* OK, go for it */
+ if (mkdir(dir, S_IRWXU) < 0)
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode_for_file_access(),
+ errmsg("could not create directory \"%s\": %m",
+ dir)));
+ }
+
+ /* OK to drop the exclusive lock */
+ heap_close(rel, ExclusiveLock);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode_for_file_access(),
+ errmsg("could not stat directory \"%s\": %m", dir)));
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* be paranoid */
+ if (!S_ISDIR(st.st_mode))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_WRONG_OBJECT_TYPE),
+ errmsg("\"%s\" exists but is not a directory",
+ dir)));
+ }
+
+ pfree(dir);
+#endif /* HAVE_SYMLINK */
+}
+
+/*
+ * Create a table space
+ *
+ * Only superusers can create a tablespace. This seems a reasonable restriction
+ * since we're determining the system layout and, anyway, we probably have
+ * root if we're doing this kind of activity
+ */
+void
+CreateTableSpace(CreateTableSpaceStmt *stmt)
+{
+#ifdef HAVE_SYMLINK
+ Relation rel;
+ Datum values[Natts_pg_tablespace];
+ char nulls[Natts_pg_tablespace];
+ HeapTuple tuple;
+ Oid tablespaceoid;
+ char *location;
+ char *linkloc;
+ AclId ownerid;
+
+ /* validate */
+
+ /* don't call this in a transaction block */
+ PreventTransactionChain((void *) stmt, "CREATE TABLESPACE");
+
+ /* Must be super user */
+ if (!superuser())
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE),
+ errmsg("permission denied to create tablespace \"%s\"",
+ stmt->tablespacename),
+ errhint("Must be superuser to create a tablespace.")));
+
+ /* However, the eventual owner of the tablespace need not be */
+ if (stmt->owner)
+ {
+ /* No need to check result, get_usesysid() does that */
+ ownerid = get_usesysid(stmt->owner);
+ }
+ else
+ ownerid = GetUserId();
+
+ /* Unix-ify the offered path, and strip any trailing slashes */
+ location = pstrdup(stmt->location);
+ canonicalize_path(location);
+
+ /* disallow quotes, else CREATE DATABASE would be at risk */
+ if (strchr(location, '\''))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_NAME),
+ errmsg("tablespace location may not contain single quotes")));
+
+ /*
+ * Allowing relative paths seems risky
+ *
+ * this also helps us ensure that location is not empty or whitespace
+ */
+ if (!is_absolute_path(location))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_OBJECT_DEFINITION),
+ errmsg("tablespace location must be an absolute path")));
+
+ /*
+ * Check that location isn't too long. Remember that we're going to append
+ * '/<dboid>/<relid>.<nnn>' (XXX but do we ever form the whole path
+ * explicitly? This may be overly conservative.)
+ */
+ if (strlen(location) >= (MAXPGPATH - 1 - 10 - 1 - 10 - 1 - 10))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_OBJECT_DEFINITION),
+ errmsg("tablespace location \"%s\" is too long",
+ location)));
+
+ /*
+ * Check that there is no other tablespace by this name. (The
+ * unique index would catch this anyway, but might as well give
+ * a friendlier message.)
+ */
+ if (OidIsValid(get_tablespace_oid(stmt->tablespacename)))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_DUPLICATE_OBJECT),
+ errmsg("tablespace \"%s\" already exists",
+ stmt->tablespacename)));
+
+ /*
+ * Insert tuple into pg_tablespace. The purpose of doing this first
+ * is to lock the proposed tablename against other would-be creators.
+ * The insertion will roll back if we find problems below.
+ */
+ rel = heap_openr(TableSpaceRelationName, RowExclusiveLock);
+
+ MemSet(nulls, ' ', Natts_pg_tablespace);
+
+ values[Anum_pg_tablespace_spcname - 1] =
+ DirectFunctionCall1(namein, CStringGetDatum(stmt->tablespacename));
+ values[Anum_pg_tablespace_spcowner - 1] =
+ Int32GetDatum(ownerid);
+ values[Anum_pg_tablespace_spclocation - 1] =
+ DirectFunctionCall1(textin, CStringGetDatum(location));
+ nulls[Anum_pg_tablespace_spcacl - 1] = 'n';
+
+ tuple = heap_formtuple(rel->rd_att, values, nulls);
+
+ tablespaceoid = newoid();
+
+ HeapTupleSetOid(tuple, tablespaceoid);
+
+ simple_heap_insert(rel, tuple);
+
+ CatalogUpdateIndexes(rel, tuple);
+
+ heap_freetuple(tuple);
+
+ /*
+ * Attempt to coerce target directory to safe permissions. If this
+ * fails, it doesn't exist or has the wrong owner.
+ */
+ if (chmod(location, 0700) != 0)
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode_for_file_access(),
+ errmsg("could not set permissions on directory \"%s\": %m",
+ location)));
+
+ /*
+ * Check the target directory is empty.
+ */
+ if (!directory_is_empty(location))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_OBJECT_NOT_IN_PREREQUISITE_STATE),
+ errmsg("directory \"%s\" is not empty",
+ location)));
+
+ /*
+ * Create the PG_VERSION file in the target directory. This has several
+ * purposes: to make sure we can write in the directory, to prevent
+ * someone from creating another tablespace pointing at the same
+ * directory (the emptiness check above will fail), and to label
+ * tablespace directories by PG version.
+ */
+ set_short_version(location);
+
+ /*
+ * All seems well, create the symlink
+ */
+ linkloc = (char *) palloc(strlen(DataDir) + 16 + 10 + 1);
+ sprintf(linkloc, "%s/pg_tablespaces/%u", DataDir, tablespaceoid);
+
+ if (symlink(location, linkloc) < 0)
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode_for_file_access(),
+ errmsg("could not create symbolic link \"%s\": %m",
+ linkloc)));
+
+ pfree(linkloc);
+ pfree(location);
+
+ heap_close(rel, RowExclusiveLock);
+
+#else /* !HAVE_SYMLINK */
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED),
+ errmsg("tablespaces are not supported on this platform")));
+#endif /* HAVE_SYMLINK */
+}
+
+/*
+ * Drop a table space
+ *
+ * Be careful to check that the tablespace is empty.
+ */
+void
+DropTableSpace(DropTableSpaceStmt *stmt)
+{
+#ifdef HAVE_SYMLINK
+ char *tablespacename = stmt->tablespacename;
+ HeapScanDesc scandesc;
+ Relation rel;
+ HeapTuple tuple;
+ ScanKeyData entry[1];
+ char *location;
+ Oid tablespaceoid;
+ DIR *dirdesc;
+ struct dirent *de;
+ char *subfile;
+
+ /* don't call this in a transaction block */
+ PreventTransactionChain((void *) stmt, "DROP TABLESPACE");
+
+ /*
+ * Acquire ExclusiveLock on pg_tablespace to ensure that no one else
+ * is trying to do DROP TABLESPACE or TablespaceCreateDbspace concurrently.
+ */
+ rel = heap_openr(TableSpaceRelationName, ExclusiveLock);
+
+ /*
+ * Find the target tuple
+ */
+ ScanKeyInit(&entry[0],
+ Anum_pg_tablespace_spcname,
+ BTEqualStrategyNumber, F_NAMEEQ,
+ CStringGetDatum(tablespacename));
+ scandesc = heap_beginscan(rel, SnapshotNow, 1, entry);
+ tuple = heap_getnext(scandesc, ForwardScanDirection);
+
+ if (!HeapTupleIsValid(tuple))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT),
+ errmsg("tablespace \"%s\" does not exist",
+ tablespacename)));
+
+ tablespaceoid = HeapTupleGetOid(tuple);
+
+ /* Must be superuser or owner */
+ if (GetUserId() != ((Form_pg_tablespace) GETSTRUCT(tuple))->spcowner &&
+ !superuser())
+ aclcheck_error(ACLCHECK_NOT_OWNER, ACL_KIND_TABLESPACE,
+ tablespacename);
+
+ /* Disallow drop of the standard tablespaces, even by superuser */
+ if (tablespaceoid == GLOBALTABLESPACE_OID ||
+ tablespaceoid == DEFAULTTABLESPACE_OID)
+ aclcheck_error(ACLCHECK_NO_PRIV, ACL_KIND_TABLESPACE,
+ tablespacename);
+
+ location = (char *) palloc(strlen(DataDir) + 16 + 10 + 1);
+ sprintf(location, "%s/pg_tablespaces/%u", DataDir, tablespaceoid);
+
+ /*
+ * Check if the tablespace still contains any files. We try to rmdir
+ * each per-database directory we find in it. rmdir failure implies
+ * there are still files in that subdirectory, so give up. (We do not
+ * have to worry about undoing any already completed rmdirs, since
+ * the next attempt to use the tablespace from that database will simply
+ * recreate the subdirectory via TablespaceCreateDbspace.)
+ *
+ * Since we hold exclusive lock, no one else should be creating any
+ * fresh subdirectories in parallel. It is possible that new files
+ * are being created within subdirectories, though, so the rmdir
+ * call could fail. Worst consequence is a less friendly error message.
+ */
+ dirdesc = AllocateDir(location);
+ if (dirdesc == NULL)
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode_for_file_access(),
+ errmsg("could not open directory \"%s\": %m",
+ location)));
+
+ errno = 0;
+ while ((de = readdir(dirdesc)) != NULL)
+ {
+ /* Note we ignore PG_VERSION for the nonce */
+ if (strcmp(de->d_name, ".") == 0 ||
+ strcmp(de->d_name, "..") == 0 ||
+ strcmp(de->d_name, "PG_VERSION") == 0)
+ {
+ errno = 0;
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ subfile = palloc(strlen(location) + 1 + strlen(de->d_name) + 1);
+ sprintf(subfile, "%s/%s", location, de->d_name);
+
+ /* This check is just to deliver a friendlier error message */
+ if (!directory_is_empty(subfile))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_OBJECT_NOT_IN_PREREQUISITE_STATE),
+ errmsg("tablespace \"%s\" is not empty",
+ tablespacename)));
+
+ /* Do the real deed */
+ if (rmdir(subfile) < 0)
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode_for_file_access(),
+ errmsg("could not delete directory \"%s\": %m",
+ subfile)));
+
+ pfree(subfile);
+ }
+#ifdef WIN32
+ /* This fix is in mingw cvs (runtime/mingwex/dirent.c rev 1.4), but
+ not in released version */
+ if (GetLastError() == ERROR_NO_MORE_FILES)
+ errno = 0;
+#endif
+ if (errno)
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode_for_file_access(),
+ errmsg("could not read directory \"%s\": %m",
+ location)));
+ FreeDir(dirdesc);
+
+ /*
+ * Okay, try to unlink PG_VERSION and then remove the symlink.
+ */
+ subfile = palloc(strlen(location) + 11 + 1);
+ sprintf(subfile, "%s/PG_VERSION", location);
+
+ if (unlink(subfile) < 0)
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode_for_file_access(),
+ errmsg("could not unlink file \"%s\": %m",
+ subfile)));
+
+ if (unlink(location) < 0)
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode_for_file_access(),
+ errmsg("could not unlink symbolic link \"%s\": %m",
+ location)));
+
+ pfree(subfile);
+ pfree(location);
+
+ /*
+ * We have successfully destroyed the infrastructure ... there is
+ * now no way to roll back the DROP ... so proceed to remove the
+ * pg_tablespace tuple.
+ */
+ simple_heap_delete(rel, &tuple->t_self);
+
+ heap_endscan(scandesc);
+
+ heap_close(rel, ExclusiveLock);
+
+#else /* !HAVE_SYMLINK */
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED),
+ errmsg("tablespaces are not supported on this platform")));
+#endif /* HAVE_SYMLINK */
+}
+
+
+/*
+ * write out the PG_VERSION file in the specified directory
+ */
+static void
+set_short_version(const char *path)
+{
+ char *short_version;
+ bool gotdot = false;
+ int end;
+ char *fullname;
+ FILE *version_file;
+
+ /* Construct short version string (should match initdb.c) */
+ short_version = pstrdup(PG_VERSION);
+
+ for (end = 0; short_version[end] != '\0'; end++)
+ {
+ if (short_version[end] == '.')
+ {
+ Assert(end != 0);
+ if (gotdot)
+ break;
+ else
+ gotdot = true;
+ }
+ else if (short_version[end] < '0' || short_version[end] > '9')
+ {
+ /* gone past digits and dots */
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ Assert(end > 0 && short_version[end - 1] != '.' && gotdot);
+ short_version[end] = '\0';
+
+ /* Now write the file */
+ fullname = palloc(strlen(path) + 11 + 1);
+ sprintf(fullname, "%s/PG_VERSION", path);
+ version_file = AllocateFile(fullname, PG_BINARY_W);
+ if (version_file == NULL)
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode_for_file_access(),
+ errmsg("could not write to file \"%s\": %m",
+ fullname)));
+ fprintf(version_file, "%s\n", short_version);
+ if (FreeFile(version_file))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode_for_file_access(),
+ errmsg("could not write to file \"%s\": %m",
+ fullname)));
+
+ pfree(fullname);
+ pfree(short_version);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Check if a directory is empty.
+ */
+static bool
+directory_is_empty(const char *path)
+{
+ DIR *dirdesc;
+ struct dirent *de;
+
+ dirdesc = AllocateDir(path);
+ if (dirdesc == NULL)
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode_for_file_access(),
+ errmsg("could not open directory \"%s\": %m",
+ path)));
+
+ errno = 0;
+ while ((de = readdir(dirdesc)) != NULL)
+ {
+ if (strcmp(de->d_name, ".") == 0 ||
+ strcmp(de->d_name, "..") == 0)
+ {
+ errno = 0;
+ continue;
+ }
+ FreeDir(dirdesc);
+ return false;
+ }
+#ifdef WIN32
+ /* This fix is in mingw cvs (runtime/mingwex/dirent.c rev 1.4), but
+ not in released version */
+ if (GetLastError() == ERROR_NO_MORE_FILES)
+ errno = 0;
+#endif
+ if (errno)
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode_for_file_access(),
+ errmsg("could not read directory \"%s\": %m",
+ path)));
+ FreeDir(dirdesc);
+ return true;
+}
+
+/*
+ * get_tablespace_oid - given a tablespace name, look up the OID
+ *
+ * Returns InvalidOid if tablespace name not found.
+ */
+Oid
+get_tablespace_oid(const char *tablespacename)
+{
+ Oid result;
+ Relation rel;
+ HeapScanDesc scandesc;
+ HeapTuple tuple;
+ ScanKeyData entry[1];
+
+ /* Search pg_tablespace */
+ rel = heap_openr(TableSpaceRelationName, AccessShareLock);
+
+ ScanKeyInit(&entry[0],
+ Anum_pg_tablespace_spcname,
+ BTEqualStrategyNumber, F_NAMEEQ,
+ CStringGetDatum(tablespacename));
+ scandesc = heap_beginscan(rel, SnapshotNow, 1, entry);
+ tuple = heap_getnext(scandesc, ForwardScanDirection);
+
+ if (HeapTupleIsValid(tuple))
+ result = HeapTupleGetOid(tuple);
+ else
+ result = InvalidOid;
+
+ heap_endscan(scandesc);
+ heap_close(rel, AccessShareLock);
+
+ return result;
+}
+
+/*
+ * get_tablespace_name - given a tablespace OID, look up the name
+ *
+ * Returns a palloc'd string, or NULL if no such tablespace.
+ */
+char *
+get_tablespace_name(Oid spc_oid)
+{
+ char *result;
+ Relation rel;
+ HeapScanDesc scandesc;
+ HeapTuple tuple;
+ ScanKeyData entry[1];
+
+ /* Search pg_tablespace */
+ rel = heap_openr(TableSpaceRelationName, AccessShareLock);
+
+ ScanKeyInit(&entry[0],
+ ObjectIdAttributeNumber,
+ BTEqualStrategyNumber, F_OIDEQ,
+ ObjectIdGetDatum(spc_oid));
+ scandesc = heap_beginscan(rel, SnapshotNow, 1, entry);
+ tuple = heap_getnext(scandesc, ForwardScanDirection);
+
+ /* We assume that there can be at most one matching tuple */
+ if (HeapTupleIsValid(tuple))
+ result = pstrdup(NameStr(((Form_pg_tablespace) GETSTRUCT(tuple))->spcname));
+ else
+ result = NULL;
+
+ heap_endscan(scandesc);
+ heap_close(rel, AccessShareLock);
+
+ return result;
+}
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/typecmds.c,v 1.59 2004/06/10 17:55:56 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/typecmds.c,v 1.60 2004/06/18 06:13:23 tgl Exp $
*
* DESCRIPTION
* The "DefineFoo" routines take the parse tree and pick out the
errmsg("composite type must have at least one attribute")));
/*
- * now create the parameters for keys/inheritance etc. All of them are
- * nil...
+ * now set the parameters for keys/inheritance etc. All of these
+ * are uninteresting for composite types...
*/
createStmt->relation = (RangeVar *) typevar;
createStmt->tableElts = coldeflist;
createStmt->constraints = NIL;
createStmt->hasoids = MUST_NOT_HAVE_OIDS;
createStmt->oncommit = ONCOMMIT_NOOP;
+ createStmt->tablespacename = NULL;
/*
* finally create the relation...
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/view.c,v 1.82 2004/05/26 04:41:13 neilc Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/view.c,v 1.83 2004/06/18 06:13:23 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
else
{
/*
- * now create the parameters for keys/inheritance etc. All of them
- * are nil...
+ * now set the parameters for keys/inheritance etc. All of these
+ * are uninteresting for views...
*/
createStmt->relation = (RangeVar *) relation;
createStmt->tableElts = attrList;
createStmt->constraints = NIL;
createStmt->hasoids = MUST_NOT_HAVE_OIDS;
createStmt->oncommit = ONCOMMIT_NOOP;
+ createStmt->tablespacename = NULL;
/*
* finally create the relation (this will error out if there's an
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execMain.c,v 1.233 2004/05/30 23:40:26 neilc Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execMain.c,v 1.234 2004/06/18 06:13:26 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
intoRelationId = heap_create_with_catalog(intoName,
namespaceId,
+ InvalidOid,
tupdesc,
RELKIND_RELATION,
false,
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/nodes/copyfuncs.c,v 1.285 2004/06/09 19:08:15 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/nodes/copyfuncs.c,v 1.286 2004/06/18 06:13:28 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
COPY_NODE_FIELD(constraints);
COPY_SCALAR_FIELD(hasoids);
COPY_SCALAR_FIELD(oncommit);
+ COPY_STRING_FIELD(tablespacename);
return newnode;
}
COPY_STRING_FIELD(idxname);
COPY_NODE_FIELD(relation);
COPY_STRING_FIELD(accessMethod);
+ COPY_STRING_FIELD(tableSpace);
COPY_NODE_FIELD(indexParams);
COPY_NODE_FIELD(whereClause);
COPY_NODE_FIELD(rangetable);
COPY_NODE_FIELD(sequence);
COPY_NODE_FIELD(options);
+ COPY_STRING_FIELD(tablespacename);
return newnode;
}
return newnode;
}
+static CreateTableSpaceStmt *
+_copyCreateTableSpaceStmt(CreateTableSpaceStmt *from)
+{
+ CreateTableSpaceStmt *newnode = makeNode(CreateTableSpaceStmt);
+
+ COPY_STRING_FIELD(tablespacename);
+ COPY_STRING_FIELD(owner);
+ COPY_STRING_FIELD(location);
+
+ return newnode;
+}
+
+static DropTableSpaceStmt *
+_copyDropTableSpaceStmt(DropTableSpaceStmt *from)
+{
+ DropTableSpaceStmt *newnode = makeNode(DropTableSpaceStmt);
+
+ COPY_STRING_FIELD(tablespacename);
+
+ return newnode;
+}
+
static CreateTrigStmt *
_copyCreateTrigStmt(CreateTrigStmt *from)
{
COPY_STRING_FIELD(schemaname);
COPY_STRING_FIELD(authid);
+ COPY_STRING_FIELD(tablespacename);
COPY_NODE_FIELD(schemaElts);
return newnode;
case T_VariableResetStmt:
retval = _copyVariableResetStmt(from);
break;
+ case T_CreateTableSpaceStmt:
+ retval = _copyCreateTableSpaceStmt(from);
+ break;
+ case T_DropTableSpaceStmt:
+ retval = _copyDropTableSpaceStmt(from);
+ break;
case T_CreateTrigStmt:
retval = _copyCreateTrigStmt(from);
break;
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/nodes/equalfuncs.c,v 1.224 2004/06/09 19:08:15 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/nodes/equalfuncs.c,v 1.225 2004/06/18 06:13:28 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
COMPARE_NODE_FIELD(constraints);
COMPARE_SCALAR_FIELD(hasoids);
COMPARE_SCALAR_FIELD(oncommit);
+ COMPARE_STRING_FIELD(tablespacename);
return true;
}
COMPARE_STRING_FIELD(idxname);
COMPARE_NODE_FIELD(relation);
COMPARE_STRING_FIELD(accessMethod);
+ COMPARE_STRING_FIELD(tableSpace);
COMPARE_NODE_FIELD(indexParams);
COMPARE_NODE_FIELD(whereClause);
COMPARE_NODE_FIELD(rangetable);
{
COMPARE_NODE_FIELD(sequence);
COMPARE_NODE_FIELD(options);
+ COMPARE_STRING_FIELD(tablespacename);
return true;
}
return true;
}
+static bool
+_equalCreateTableSpaceStmt(CreateTableSpaceStmt *a, CreateTableSpaceStmt *b)
+{
+ COMPARE_STRING_FIELD(tablespacename);
+ COMPARE_STRING_FIELD(owner);
+ COMPARE_STRING_FIELD(location);
+
+ return true;
+}
+
+static bool
+_equalDropTableSpaceStmt(DropTableSpaceStmt *a, DropTableSpaceStmt *b)
+{
+ COMPARE_STRING_FIELD(tablespacename);
+
+ return true;
+}
+
static bool
_equalCreateTrigStmt(CreateTrigStmt *a, CreateTrigStmt *b)
{
{
COMPARE_STRING_FIELD(schemaname);
COMPARE_STRING_FIELD(authid);
+ COMPARE_STRING_FIELD(tablespacename);
COMPARE_NODE_FIELD(schemaElts);
return true;
case T_VariableResetStmt:
retval = _equalVariableResetStmt(a, b);
break;
+ case T_CreateTableSpaceStmt:
+ retval = _equalCreateTableSpaceStmt(a, b);
+ break;
+ case T_DropTableSpaceStmt:
+ retval = _equalDropTableSpaceStmt(a, b);
+ break;
case T_CreateTrigStmt:
retval = _equalCreateTrigStmt(a, b);
break;
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/nodes/outfuncs.c,v 1.239 2004/06/09 19:08:15 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/nodes/outfuncs.c,v 1.240 2004/06/18 06:13:28 tgl Exp $
*
* NOTES
* Every node type that can appear in stored rules' parsetrees *must*
static void
_outCreateStmt(StringInfo str, CreateStmt *node)
{
- WRITE_NODE_TYPE("CREATE");
+ WRITE_NODE_TYPE("CREATESTMT");
WRITE_NODE_FIELD(relation);
WRITE_NODE_FIELD(tableElts);
WRITE_NODE_FIELD(constraints);
WRITE_ENUM_FIELD(hasoids, ContainsOids);
WRITE_ENUM_FIELD(oncommit, OnCommitAction);
+ WRITE_STRING_FIELD(tablespacename);
}
static void
_outIndexStmt(StringInfo str, IndexStmt *node)
{
- WRITE_NODE_TYPE("INDEX");
+ WRITE_NODE_TYPE("INDEXSTMT");
WRITE_STRING_FIELD(idxname);
WRITE_NODE_FIELD(relation);
WRITE_STRING_FIELD(accessMethod);
+ WRITE_STRING_FIELD(tableSpace);
WRITE_NODE_FIELD(indexParams);
WRITE_NODE_FIELD(whereClause);
WRITE_NODE_FIELD(rangetable);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2003, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/analyze.c,v 1.305 2004/06/10 17:55:58 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/analyze.c,v 1.306 2004/06/18 06:13:31 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
seqstmt = makeNode(CreateSeqStmt);
seqstmt->sequence = makeRangeVar(snamespace, sname);
seqstmt->options = NIL;
+ seqstmt->tablespacename = NULL;
cxt->blist = lappend(cxt->blist, seqstmt);
index->relation = cxt->relation;
index->accessMethod = DEFAULT_INDEX_TYPE;
+ index->tableSpace = NULL;
index->indexParams = NIL;
index->whereClause = NULL;
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/gram.y,v 2.461 2004/06/09 19:08:17 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/gram.y,v 2.462 2004/06/18 06:13:31 tgl Exp $
*
* HISTORY
* AUTHOR DATE MAJOR EVENT
AnalyzeStmt ClosePortalStmt ClusterStmt CommentStmt
ConstraintsSetStmt CopyStmt CreateAsStmt CreateCastStmt
CreateDomainStmt CreateGroupStmt CreateOpClassStmt CreatePLangStmt
- CreateSchemaStmt CreateSeqStmt CreateStmt
+ CreateSchemaStmt CreateSeqStmt CreateStmt CreateTableSpaceStmt
CreateAssertStmt CreateTrigStmt CreateUserStmt
CreatedbStmt DeclareCursorStmt DefineStmt DeleteStmt
DropGroupStmt DropOpClassStmt DropPLangStmt DropStmt
DropAssertStmt DropTrigStmt DropRuleStmt DropCastStmt
- DropUserStmt DropdbStmt ExplainStmt FetchStmt
+ DropUserStmt DropdbStmt DropTableSpaceStmt ExplainStmt FetchStmt
GrantStmt IndexStmt InsertStmt ListenStmt LoadStmt
LockStmt NotifyStmt ExplainableStmt PreparableStmt
CreateFunctionStmt ReindexStmt RemoveAggrStmt
%type <list> constraints_set_list
%type <boolean> constraints_set_mode
+%type <str> OptTableSpace OptTableSpaceOwner
/*
ORDER OUT_P OUTER_P OVERLAPS OVERLAY OWNER
PARTIAL PASSWORD PATH_P PENDANT PLACING POSITION
- PRECISION PRESERVE PREPARE PRIMARY
+ PRECISION PRESERVE PREPARE PRIMARY
PRIOR PRIVILEGES PROCEDURAL PROCEDURE
QUOTE
SHOW SIMILAR SIMPLE SMALLINT SOME STABLE START STATEMENT
STATISTICS STDIN STDOUT STORAGE STRICT_P SUBSTRING SYSID
- TABLE TEMP TEMPLATE TEMPORARY THEN TIME TIMESTAMP
+ TABLE TABLESPACE TEMP TEMPLATE TEMPORARY THEN TIME TIMESTAMP
TO TOAST TRAILING TRANSACTION TREAT TRIGGER TRIM TRUE_P
TRUNCATE TRUSTED TYPE_P
| CreateSchemaStmt
| CreateSeqStmt
| CreateStmt
+ | CreateTableSpaceStmt
| CreateTrigStmt
| CreateUserStmt
| CreatedbStmt
| DropPLangStmt
| DropRuleStmt
| DropStmt
+ | DropTableSpaceStmt
| DropTrigStmt
| DropUserStmt
| DropdbStmt
*****************************************************************************/
CreateSchemaStmt:
- CREATE SCHEMA OptSchemaName AUTHORIZATION UserId OptSchemaEltList
+ CREATE SCHEMA OptSchemaName AUTHORIZATION UserId OptTableSpace OptSchemaEltList
{
CreateSchemaStmt *n = makeNode(CreateSchemaStmt);
/* One can omit the schema name or the authorization id. */
else
n->schemaname = $5;
n->authid = $5;
- n->schemaElts = $6;
+ n->tablespacename = $6;
+ n->schemaElts = $7;
$$ = (Node *)n;
}
- | CREATE SCHEMA ColId OptSchemaEltList
+ | CREATE SCHEMA ColId OptTableSpace OptSchemaEltList
{
CreateSchemaStmt *n = makeNode(CreateSchemaStmt);
/* ...but not both */
n->schemaname = $3;
n->authid = NULL;
- n->schemaElts = $4;
+ n->tablespacename = $4;
+ n->schemaElts = $5;
$$ = (Node *)n;
}
;
n->name = $3;
$$ = (Node *)n;
}
- /* ALTER TABLE <name> SET WITHOUT CLUSTER */
+ /* ALTER TABLE <name> SET WITHOUT CLUSTER */
| SET WITHOUT CLUSTER
{
AlterTableCmd *n = makeNode(AlterTableCmd);
*****************************************************************************/
CreateStmt: CREATE OptTemp TABLE qualified_name '(' OptTableElementList ')'
- OptInherit OptWithOids OnCommitOption
+ OptInherit OptWithOids OnCommitOption OptTableSpace
{
CreateStmt *n = makeNode(CreateStmt);
$4->istemp = $2;
n->constraints = NIL;
n->hasoids = $9;
n->oncommit = $10;
+ n->tablespacename = $11;
$$ = (Node *)n;
}
| CREATE OptTemp TABLE qualified_name OF qualified_name
- '(' OptTableElementList ')' OptWithOids OnCommitOption
+ '(' OptTableElementList ')' OptWithOids OnCommitOption OptTableSpace
{
/* SQL99 CREATE TABLE OF <UDT> (cols) seems to be satisfied
* by our inheritance capabilities. Let's try it...
n->constraints = NIL;
n->hasoids = $10;
n->oncommit = $11;
+ n->tablespacename = $12;
$$ = (Node *)n;
}
;
| /*EMPTY*/ { $$ = ONCOMMIT_NOOP; }
;
+OptTableSpace: TABLESPACE name { $$ = $2; }
+ | /*EMPTY*/ { $$ = NULL; }
+ ;
+
/*
* Note: CREATE TABLE ... AS SELECT ... is just another spelling for
*****************************************************************************/
CreateSeqStmt:
- CREATE OptTemp SEQUENCE qualified_name OptSeqList
+ CREATE OptTemp SEQUENCE qualified_name OptSeqList OptTableSpace
{
CreateSeqStmt *n = makeNode(CreateSeqStmt);
$4->istemp = $2;
n->sequence = $4;
n->options = $5;
+ n->tablespacename = $6;
$$ = (Node *)n;
}
;
| /*EMPTY*/ {}
;
+/*****************************************************************************
+ *
+ * QUERY:
+ * CREATE TABLESPACE tablespace LOCATION '/path/to/tablespace/'
+ *
+ *****************************************************************************/
+
+CreateTableSpaceStmt: CREATE TABLESPACE name OptTableSpaceOwner LOCATION Sconst
+ {
+ CreateTableSpaceStmt *n = makeNode(CreateTableSpaceStmt);
+ n->tablespacename = $3;
+ n->owner = $4;
+ n->location = $6;
+ $$ = (Node *) n;
+ }
+ ;
+
+OptTableSpaceOwner: OWNER name { $$ = $2; }
+ | /*EMPTY */ { $$ = NULL; }
+ ;
+
+/*****************************************************************************
+ *
+ * QUERY :
+ * DROP TABLESPACE <tablespace>
+ *
+ * No need for drop behaviour as we cannot implement dependencies for
+ * objects in other databases; we can only support RESTRICT.
+ *
+ ****************************************************************************/
+
+DropTableSpaceStmt: DROP TABLESPACE name
+ {
+ DropTableSpaceStmt *n = makeNode(DropTableSpaceStmt);
+ n->tablespacename = $3;
+ $$ = (Node *) n;
+ }
+ ;
+
/*****************************************************************************
*
* QUERIES :
n->objargs = NIL;
n->comment = $7;
$$ = (Node *) n;
- }
+ }
;
comment_type:
n->objs = $2;
$$ = n;
}
+ | TABLESPACE name_list
+ {
+ PrivTarget *n = makeNode(PrivTarget);
+ n->objtype = ACL_OBJECT_TABLESPACE;
+ n->objs = $2;
+ $$ = n;
+ }
;
* QUERY:
* create index <indexname> on <relname>
* [ using <access> ] "(" ( <col> [ using <opclass> ] )+ ")"
- * [ where <predicate> ]
+ * [
tablespace <tablespacename> ] [ where <predicate> ]
*
+ * Note: we cannot put TABLESPACE clause after WHERE clause unless we are
+ * willing to make TABLESPACE a fully reserved word.
*****************************************************************************/
IndexStmt: CREATE index_opt_unique INDEX index_name ON qualified_name
- access_method_clause '(' index_params ')' where_clause
+ access_method_clause '(' index_params ')' OptTableSpace where_clause
{
IndexStmt *n = makeNode(IndexStmt);
n->unique = $2;
n->relation = $6;
n->accessMethod = $7;
n->indexParams = $9;
- n->whereClause = $11;
+ n->tableSpace = $11;
+ n->whereClause = $12;
$$ = (Node *)n;
}
;
;
createdb_opt_item:
- LOCATION opt_equal Sconst
+ TABLESPACE opt_equal name
+ {
+ $$ = makeDefElem("tablespace", (Node *)makeString($3));
+ }
+ | TABLESPACE opt_equal DEFAULT
+ {
+ $$ = makeDefElem("tablespace", NULL);
+ }
+ | LOCATION opt_equal Sconst
{
$$ = makeDefElem("location", (Node *)makeString($3));
}
{ $$ = list_make1(makeString("!~~*")); }
/* cannot put SIMILAR TO here, because SIMILAR TO is a hack.
* the regular expression is preprocessed by a function (similar_escape),
- * and the ~ operator for posix regular expressions is used.
+ * and the ~ operator for posix regular expressions is used.
* x SIMILAR TO y -> x ~ similar_escape(y)
* this transformation is made on the fly by the parser upwards.
* however the SubLink structure which handles any/some/all stuff
* COALESCE(a,b,...)
* same as CASE WHEN a IS NOT NULL THEN a WHEN b IS NOT NULL THEN b ... END
* - thomas 1998-11-09
- *
+ *
* NULLIF and COALESCE have become first class nodes to
* prevent double evaluation of arguments.
* - Kris Jurka 2003-02-11
| STORAGE
| SYSID
| STRICT_P
+ | TABLESPACE
| TEMP
| TEMPLATE
| TEMPORARY
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/keywords.c,v 1.149 2004/04/21 00:34:18 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/keywords.c,v 1.150 2004/06/18 06:13:31 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
{"substring", SUBSTRING},
{"sysid", SYSID},
{"table", TABLE},
+ {"tablespace", TABLESPACE},
{"temp", TEMP},
{"template", TEMPLATE},
{"temporary", TEMPORARY},
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/buffer/bufmgr.c,v 1.170 2004/06/11 16:43:23 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/buffer/bufmgr.c,v 1.171 2004/06/18 06:13:33 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
*/
dirty_buffers = (BufferDesc **) palloc(NBuffers * sizeof(BufferDesc *));
buftags = (BufferTag *) palloc(NBuffers * sizeof(BufferTag));
-
+
LWLockAcquire(BufMgrLock, LW_EXCLUSIVE);
num_buffer_dirty = StrategyDirtyBufferList(dirty_buffers, buftags,
NBuffers);
if (isCommit)
elog(WARNING,
"buffer refcount leak: [%03d] "
- "(rel=%u/%u, blockNum=%u, flags=0x%x, refcount=%u %d)",
+ "(rel=%u/%u/%u, blockNum=%u, flags=0x%x, refcount=%u %d)",
i,
- buf->tag.rnode.tblNode, buf->tag.rnode.relNode,
+ buf->tag.rnode.spcNode, buf->tag.rnode.dbNode,
+ buf->tag.rnode.relNode,
buf->tag.blockNum, buf->flags,
buf->refcount, PrivateRefCount[i]);
{
/* the sole pin should be ours */
if (bufHdr->refcount != 1 || PrivateRefCount[i - 1] == 0)
- elog(FATAL, "block %u of %u/%u is still referenced (private %d, global %u)",
+ elog(FATAL, "block %u of %u/%u/%u is still referenced (private %d, global %u)",
bufHdr->tag.blockNum,
- bufHdr->tag.rnode.tblNode,
+ bufHdr->tag.rnode.spcNode,
+ bufHdr->tag.rnode.dbNode,
bufHdr->tag.rnode.relNode,
PrivateRefCount[i - 1], bufHdr->refcount);
/* Make sure it will be released */
{
bufHdr = &BufferDescriptors[i - 1];
recheck:
-
- /*
- * We know that currently database OID is tblNode but this
- * probably will be changed in future and this func will be used
- * to drop tablespace buffers.
- */
- if (bufHdr->tag.rnode.tblNode == dbid)
+ if (bufHdr->tag.rnode.dbNode == dbid)
{
/*
* If there is I/O in progress, better wait till it's done;
for (i = 0; i < NBuffers; ++i, ++buf)
{
elog(LOG,
- "[%02d] (freeNext=%d, freePrev=%d, rel=%u/%u, "
+ "[%02d] (freeNext=%d, freePrev=%d, rel=%u/%u/%u, "
"blockNum=%u, flags=0x%x, refcount=%u %d)",
i, buf->freeNext, buf->freePrev,
- buf->tag.rnode.tblNode, buf->tag.rnode.relNode,
+ buf->tag.rnode.spcNode, buf->tag.rnode.dbNode,
+ buf->tag.rnode.relNode,
buf->tag.blockNum, buf->flags,
buf->refcount, PrivateRefCount[i]);
}
/* interactive backend */
for (i = 0; i < NBuffers; ++i, ++buf)
{
- printf("[%-2d] (%u/%u, %u) flags=0x%x, refcount=%u %d)\n",
- i, buf->tag.rnode.tblNode, buf->tag.rnode.relNode,
- buf->tag.blockNum,
+ printf("[%-2d] (%u/%u/%u, %u) flags=0x%x, refcount=%u %d)\n",
+ i, buf->tag.rnode.spcNode, buf->tag.rnode.dbNode,
+ buf->tag.rnode.relNode, buf->tag.blockNum,
buf->flags, buf->refcount, PrivateRefCount[i]);
}
}
{
if (PrivateRefCount[i] > 0)
elog(WARNING,
- "[%02d] (freeNext=%d, freePrev=%d, rel=%u/%u, "
+ "[%02d] (freeNext=%d, freePrev=%d, rel=%u/%u/%u, "
"blockNum=%u, flags=0x%x, refcount=%u %d)",
i, buf->freeNext, buf->freePrev,
- buf->tag.rnode.tblNode, buf->tag.rnode.relNode,
+ buf->tag.rnode.spcNode, buf->tag.rnode.dbNode,
+ buf->tag.rnode.relNode,
buf->tag.blockNum, buf->flags,
buf->refcount, PrivateRefCount[i]);
}
BufferDesc *buf = &BufferDescriptors[buffer - 1];
fprintf(stderr,
- "PIN(Incr) %d rel = %u/%u, blockNum = %u, "
+ "PIN(Incr) %d rel = %u/%u/%u, blockNum = %u, "
"refcount = %d, file: %s, line: %d\n",
buffer,
- buf->tag.rnode.tblNode, buf->tag.rnode.relNode,
- buf->tag.blockNum,
+ buf->tag.rnode.spcNode, buf->tag.rnode.dbNode,
+ buf->tag.rnode.relNode, buf->tag.blockNum,
PrivateRefCount[buffer - 1], file, line);
}
}
BufferDesc *buf = &BufferDescriptors[buffer - 1];
fprintf(stderr,
- "UNPIN(Rel) %d rel = %u/%u, blockNum = %u, "
+ "UNPIN(Rel) %d rel = %u/%u/%u, blockNum = %u, "
"refcount = %d, file: %s, line: %d\n",
buffer,
- buf->tag.rnode.tblNode, buf->tag.rnode.relNode,
- buf->tag.blockNum,
+ buf->tag.rnode.spcNode, buf->tag.rnode.dbNode,
+ buf->tag.rnode.relNode, buf->tag.blockNum,
PrivateRefCount[buffer - 1], file, line);
}
}
BufferDesc *buf = &BufferDescriptors[buffer - 1];
fprintf(stderr,
- "UNPIN(Rel&Rd) %d rel = %u/%u, blockNum = %u, "
+ "UNPIN(Rel&Rd) %d rel = %u/%u/%u, blockNum = %u, "
"refcount = %d, file: %s, line: %d\n",
buffer,
- buf->tag.rnode.tblNode, buf->tag.rnode.relNode,
- buf->tag.blockNum,
+ buf->tag.rnode.spcNode, buf->tag.rnode.dbNode,
+ buf->tag.rnode.relNode, buf->tag.blockNum,
PrivateRefCount[buffer - 1], file, line);
}
if (ShowPinTrace && BufferIsLocal(buffer) && is_userbuffer(buffer))
BufferDesc *buf = &BufferDescriptors[b - 1];
fprintf(stderr,
- "PIN(Rel&Rd) %d rel = %u/%u, blockNum = %u, "
+ "PIN(Rel&Rd) %d rel = %u/%u/%u, blockNum = %u, "
"refcount = %d, file: %s, line: %d\n",
b,
- buf->tag.rnode.tblNode, buf->tag.rnode.relNode,
- buf->tag.blockNum,
+ buf->tag.rnode.spcNode, buf->tag.rnode.dbNode,
+ buf->tag.rnode.relNode, buf->tag.blockNum,
PrivateRefCount[b - 1], file, line);
}
return b;
{
ereport(WARNING,
(errcode(ERRCODE_IO_ERROR),
- errmsg("could not write block %u of %u/%u",
+ errmsg("could not write block %u of %u/%u/%u",
buf->tag.blockNum,
- buf->tag.rnode.tblNode,
+ buf->tag.rnode.spcNode,
+ buf->tag.rnode.dbNode,
buf->tag.rnode.relNode),
errdetail("Multiple failures --- write error may be permanent.")));
}
BufferDesc *bufHdr = (BufferDesc *) arg;
if (bufHdr != NULL)
- errcontext("writing block %u of relation %u/%u",
+ errcontext("writing block %u of relation %u/%u/%u",
bufHdr->tag.blockNum,
- bufHdr->tag.rnode.tblNode, bufHdr->tag.rnode.relNode);
+ bufHdr->tag.rnode.spcNode,
+ bufHdr->tag.rnode.dbNode,
+ bufHdr->tag.rnode.relNode);
}
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/buffer/localbuf.c,v 1.55 2004/05/31 20:31:33 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/buffer/localbuf.c,v 1.56 2004/06/18 06:13:33 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
if (isCommit)
elog(WARNING,
- "local buffer leak: [%03d] (rel=%u/%u, blockNum=%u, flags=0x%x, refcount=%u %d)",
+ "local buffer leak: [%03d] (rel=%u/%u/%u, blockNum=%u, flags=0x%x, refcount=%u %d)",
i,
- buf->tag.rnode.tblNode, buf->tag.rnode.relNode,
- buf->tag.blockNum, buf->flags,
+ buf->tag.rnode.spcNode, buf->tag.rnode.dbNode,
+ buf->tag.rnode.relNode, buf->tag.blockNum, buf->flags,
buf->refcount, LocalRefCount[i]);
LocalRefCount[i] = 0;
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/freespace/freespace.c,v 1.31 2004/06/05 19:48:08 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/freespace/freespace.c,v 1.32 2004/06/18 06:13:34 tgl Exp $
*
*
* NOTES:
*
* This is called during DROP DATABASE. As above, might as well reclaim
* map space sooner instead of later.
- *
- * XXX when we implement tablespaces, target Oid will need to be tablespace
- * ID not database ID.
*/
void
FreeSpaceMapForgetDatabase(Oid dbid)
for (fsmrel = FreeSpaceMap->usageList; fsmrel; fsmrel = nextrel)
{
nextrel = fsmrel->nextUsage; /* in case we delete it */
- if (fsmrel->key.tblNode == dbid)
+ if (fsmrel->key.dbNode == dbid)
delete_fsm_rel(fsmrel);
}
LWLockRelease(FreeSpaceLock);
for (fsmrel = FreeSpaceMap->usageList; fsmrel; fsmrel = fsmrel->nextUsage)
{
relNum++;
- fprintf(stderr, "Map %d: rel %u/%u isIndex %d avgRequest %u lastPageCount %d nextPage %d\nMap= ",
- relNum, fsmrel->key.tblNode, fsmrel->key.relNode,
+ fprintf(stderr, "Map %d: rel %u/%u/%u isIndex %d avgRequest %u lastPageCount %d nextPage %d\nMap= ",
+ relNum,
+ fsmrel->key.spcNode, fsmrel->key.dbNode, fsmrel->key.relNode,
(int) fsmrel->isIndex, fsmrel->avgRequest,
fsmrel->lastPageCount, fsmrel->nextPage);
if (fsmrel->isIndex)
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/smgr/md.c,v 1.107 2004/06/02 17:28:18 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/smgr/md.c,v 1.108 2004/06/18 06:13:37 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
return NULL;
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode_for_file_access(),
- errmsg("could not open relation %u/%u: %m",
- reln->smgr_rnode.tblNode,
+ errmsg("could not open relation %u/%u/%u: %m",
+ reln->smgr_rnode.spcNode,
+ reln->smgr_rnode.dbNode,
reln->smgr_rnode.relNode)));
}
}
{
ereport(LOG,
(errcode_for_file_access(),
- errmsg("could not fsync segment %u of relation %u/%u: %m",
+ errmsg("could not fsync segment %u of relation %u/%u/%u: %m",
entry->segno,
- entry->rnode.tblNode,
+ entry->rnode.spcNode,
+ entry->rnode.dbNode,
entry->rnode.relNode)));
return false;
}
return NULL;
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode_for_file_access(),
- errmsg("could not open segment %u of relation %u/%u (target block %u): %m",
+ errmsg("could not open segment %u of relation %u/%u/%u (target block %u): %m",
nextsegno,
- reln->smgr_rnode.tblNode,
+ reln->smgr_rnode.spcNode,
+ reln->smgr_rnode.dbNode,
reln->smgr_rnode.relNode,
blkno)));
}
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/smgr/smgr.c,v 1.73 2004/06/02 17:28:18 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/smgr/smgr.c,v 1.74 2004/06/18 06:13:37 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
if (! (*(smgrsw[reln->smgr_which].smgr_close)) (reln))
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode_for_file_access(),
- errmsg("could not close relation %u/%u: %m",
- reln->smgr_rnode.tblNode,
+ errmsg("could not close relation %u/%u/%u: %m",
+ reln->smgr_rnode.spcNode,
+ reln->smgr_rnode.dbNode,
reln->smgr_rnode.relNode)));
if (hash_search(SMgrRelationHash,
if (! (*(smgrsw[reln->smgr_which].smgr_create)) (reln, isRedo))
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode_for_file_access(),
- errmsg("could not create relation %u/%u: %m",
- reln->smgr_rnode.tblNode,
+ errmsg("could not create relation %u/%u/%u: %m",
+ reln->smgr_rnode.spcNode,
+ reln->smgr_rnode.dbNode,
reln->smgr_rnode.relNode)));
if (isRedo)
if (! (*(smgrsw[which].smgr_unlink)) (rnode, isRedo))
ereport(WARNING,
(errcode_for_file_access(),
- errmsg("could not unlink relation %u/%u: %m",
- rnode.tblNode,
+ errmsg("could not unlink relation %u/%u/%u: %m",
+ rnode.spcNode,
+ rnode.dbNode,
rnode.relNode)));
}
isTemp))
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode_for_file_access(),
- errmsg("could not extend relation %u/%u: %m",
- reln->smgr_rnode.tblNode,
+ errmsg("could not extend relation %u/%u/%u: %m",
+ reln->smgr_rnode.spcNode,
+ reln->smgr_rnode.dbNode,
reln->smgr_rnode.relNode),
errhint("Check free disk space.")));
}
if (! (*(smgrsw[reln->smgr_which].smgr_read)) (reln, blocknum, buffer))
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode_for_file_access(),
- errmsg("could not read block %u of relation %u/%u: %m",
+ errmsg("could not read block %u of relation %u/%u/%u: %m",
blocknum,
- reln->smgr_rnode.tblNode,
+ reln->smgr_rnode.spcNode,
+ reln->smgr_rnode.dbNode,
reln->smgr_rnode.relNode)));
}
isTemp))
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode_for_file_access(),
- errmsg("could not write block %u of relation %u/%u: %m",
+ errmsg("could not write block %u of relation %u/%u/%u: %m",
blocknum,
- reln->smgr_rnode.tblNode,
+ reln->smgr_rnode.spcNode,
+ reln->smgr_rnode.dbNode,
reln->smgr_rnode.relNode)));
}
if (nblocks == InvalidBlockNumber)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode_for_file_access(),
- errmsg("could not count blocks of relation %u/%u: %m",
- reln->smgr_rnode.tblNode,
+ errmsg("could not count blocks of relation %u/%u/%u: %m",
+ reln->smgr_rnode.spcNode,
+ reln->smgr_rnode.dbNode,
reln->smgr_rnode.relNode)));
return nblocks;
if (newblks == InvalidBlockNumber)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode_for_file_access(),
- errmsg("could not truncate relation %u/%u to %u blocks: %m",
- reln->smgr_rnode.tblNode,
+ errmsg("could not truncate relation %u/%u/%u to %u blocks: %m",
+ reln->smgr_rnode.spcNode,
+ reln->smgr_rnode.dbNode,
reln->smgr_rnode.relNode,
nblocks)));
if (! (*(smgrsw[reln->smgr_which].smgr_immedsync)) (reln))
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode_for_file_access(),
- errmsg("could not sync relation %u/%u: %m",
- reln->smgr_rnode.tblNode,
+ errmsg("could not sync relation %u/%u/%u: %m",
+ reln->smgr_rnode.spcNode,
+ reln->smgr_rnode.dbNode,
reln->smgr_rnode.relNode)));
}
if (newblks == InvalidBlockNumber)
ereport(WARNING,
(errcode_for_file_access(),
- errmsg("could not truncate relation %u/%u to %u blocks: %m",
- reln->smgr_rnode.tblNode,
+ errmsg("could not truncate relation %u/%u/%u to %u blocks: %m",
+ reln->smgr_rnode.spcNode,
+ reln->smgr_rnode.dbNode,
reln->smgr_rnode.relNode,
xlrec->blkno)));
}
{
xl_smgr_create *xlrec = (xl_smgr_create *) rec;
- sprintf(buf + strlen(buf), "file create: %u/%u",
- xlrec->rnode.tblNode, xlrec->rnode.relNode);
+ sprintf(buf + strlen(buf), "file create: %u/%u/%u",
+ xlrec->rnode.spcNode, xlrec->rnode.dbNode,
+ xlrec->rnode.relNode);
}
else if (info == XLOG_SMGR_TRUNCATE)
{
xl_smgr_truncate *xlrec = (xl_smgr_truncate *) rec;
- sprintf(buf + strlen(buf), "file truncate: %u/%u to %u blocks",
- xlrec->rnode.tblNode, xlrec->rnode.relNode,
- xlrec->blkno);
+ sprintf(buf + strlen(buf), "file truncate: %u/%u/%u to %u blocks",
+ xlrec->rnode.spcNode, xlrec->rnode.dbNode,
+ xlrec->rnode.relNode, xlrec->blkno);
}
else
strcat(buf, "UNKNOWN");
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/tcop/utility.c,v 1.218 2004/05/29 22:48:20 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/tcop/utility.c,v 1.219 2004/06/18 06:13:38 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#include "commands/schemacmds.h"
#include "commands/sequence.h"
#include "commands/tablecmds.h"
+#include "commands/tablespace.h"
#include "commands/trigger.h"
#include "commands/typecmds.h"
#include "commands/user.h"
case T_CreateSchemaStmt:
case T_CreateSeqStmt:
case T_CreateStmt:
+ case T_CreateTableSpaceStmt:
case T_CreateTrigStmt:
case T_CompositeTypeStmt:
case T_CreateUserStmt:
case T_DropCastStmt:
case T_DropStmt:
case T_DropdbStmt:
+ case T_DropTableSpaceStmt:
case T_RemoveFuncStmt:
case T_DropGroupStmt:
case T_DropPLangStmt:
}
break;
+ case T_CreateTableSpaceStmt:
+ CreateTableSpace((CreateTableSpaceStmt *) parsetree);
+ break;
+
+ case T_DropTableSpaceStmt:
+ DropTableSpace((DropTableSpaceStmt *) parsetree);
+ break;
+
case T_DropStmt:
{
DropStmt *stmt = (DropStmt *) parsetree;
DefineIndex(stmt->relation, /* relation */
stmt->idxname, /* index name */
stmt->accessMethod, /* am name */
+ stmt->tableSpace,
stmt->indexParams, /* parameters */
(Expr *) stmt->whereClause,
stmt->rangetable,
tag = "CREATE TABLE";
break;
+ case T_CreateTableSpaceStmt:
+ tag = "CREATE TABLESPACE";
+ break;
+
+ case T_DropTableSpaceStmt:
+ tag = "DROP TABLESPACE";
+ break;
+
case T_DropStmt:
switch (((DropStmt *) parsetree)->removeType)
{
case OBJECT_SCHEMA:
tag = "ALTER SCHEMA";
break;
+ case OBJECT_TABLESPACE:
+ tag = "ALTER TABLESPACE";
+ break;
case OBJECT_TRIGGER:
tag = "ALTER TRIGGER";
break;
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/acl.c,v 1.105 2004/06/01 21:49:22 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/acl.c,v 1.106 2004/06/18 06:13:49 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
world_default = ACL_NO_RIGHTS;
owner_default = ACL_ALL_RIGHTS_NAMESPACE;
break;
+ case ACL_OBJECT_TABLESPACE:
+ world_default = ACL_NO_RIGHTS;
+ owner_default = ACL_ALL_RIGHTS_TABLESPACE;
+ break;
default:
elog(ERROR, "unrecognized objtype: %d", (int) objtype);
world_default = ACL_NO_RIGHTS; /* keep compiler quiet */
* back to source text
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/ruleutils.c,v 1.172 2004/06/16 01:26:47 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/ruleutils.c,v 1.173 2004/06/18 06:13:49 tgl Exp $
*
* This software is copyrighted by Jan Wieck - Hamburg.
*
#include "catalog/pg_operator.h"
#include "catalog/pg_shadow.h"
#include "catalog/pg_trigger.h"
+#include "commands/tablespace.h"
#include "executor/spi.h"
#include "lib/stringinfo.h"
#include "nodes/makefuncs.h"
{
appendStringInfoChar(&buf, ')');
+ /*
+ * If the index is in a different tablespace from its parent,
+ * tell about that
+ */
+ if (OidIsValid(idxrelrec->reltablespace) &&
+ idxrelrec->reltablespace != get_rel_tablespace(indrelid))
+ {
+ char *spcname = get_tablespace_name(idxrelrec->reltablespace);
+
+ if (spcname) /* just paranoia... */
+ {
+ appendStringInfo(&buf, " TABLESPACE %s",
+ quote_identifier(spcname));
+ pfree(spcname);
+ }
+ }
+
/*
* If it's a partial index, decompile and append the predicate
*/
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/cache/inval.c,v 1.61 2004/05/06 16:10:57 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/cache/inval.c,v 1.62 2004/06/18 06:13:52 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/* We assume dbId need not be checked because it will never change */
/* relfilenode fields must be checked to support reassignment */
ProcessMessageList(hdr->rclist,
- if (msg->rc.relId == relId &&
+ if (msg->rc.relId == relId &&
RelFileNodeEquals(msg->rc.physId, physId)) return);
/* OK, add the item */
databaseId = InvalidOid;
else
databaseId = MyDatabaseId;
- rnode.tblNode = databaseId; /* XXX change for tablespaces */
+ if (classtup->reltablespace)
+ rnode.spcNode = classtup->reltablespace;
+ else
+ rnode.spcNode = MyDatabaseTableSpace;
+ rnode.dbNode = databaseId;
rnode.relNode = classtup->relfilenode;
/*
* Note: during a pg_class row update that assigns a new relfilenode
- * value, we will be called on both the old and new tuples, and thus
- * will broadcast invalidation messages showing both the old and new
- * relfilenode values. This ensures that other backends will close
- * smgr references to the old relfilenode file.
+ * or reltablespace value, we will be called on both the old and new
+ * tuples, and thus will broadcast invalidation messages showing both
+ * the old and new RelFileNode values. This ensures that other
+ * backends will close smgr references to the old file.
*/
}
else if (tupleRelId == RelOid_pg_attribute)
*/
databaseId = MyDatabaseId;
/* We assume no smgr cache flush is needed, either */
- rnode.tblNode = InvalidOid;
+ rnode.spcNode = InvalidOid;
+ rnode.dbNode = InvalidOid;
rnode.relNode = InvalidOid;
}
else
databaseId = InvalidOid;
else
databaseId = MyDatabaseId;
- rnode.tblNode = databaseId; /* XXX change for tablespaces */
+ if (classtup->reltablespace)
+ rnode.spcNode = classtup->reltablespace;
+ else
+ rnode.spcNode = MyDatabaseTableSpace;
+ rnode.dbNode = databaseId;
rnode.relNode = classtup->relfilenode;
RegisterRelcacheInvalidation(databaseId, relationId, rnode);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/cache/lsyscache.c,v 1.113 2004/06/06 00:41:27 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/cache/lsyscache.c,v 1.114 2004/06/18 06:13:52 tgl Exp $
*
* NOTES
* Eventually, the index information should go through here, too.
return InvalidOid;
}
+/*
+ * get_rel_tablespace
+ * Returns the pg_tablespace OID associated with a given relation.
+ *
+ * Note: failure return is InvalidOid, which cannot be distinguished from
+ * "default tablespace for this database", but that seems OK.
+ */
+Oid
+get_rel_tablespace(Oid relid)
+{
+ HeapTuple tp;
+
+ tp = SearchSysCache(RELOID,
+ ObjectIdGetDatum(relid),
+ 0, 0, 0);
+ if (HeapTupleIsValid(tp))
+ {
+ Form_pg_class reltup = (Form_pg_class) GETSTRUCT(tp);
+ Oid result;
+
+ result = reltup->reltablespace;
+ ReleaseSysCache(tp);
+ return result;
+ }
+ else
+ return InvalidOid;
+}
+
/*
* get_rel_type_id
*
return NULL;
}
+/*
+ * get_namespace_tablespace
+ * Returns the default tablespace of a given namespace
+ *
+ * Note: failure return is InvalidOid, which cannot be distinguished from
+ * "default tablespace for this database", but that seems OK.
+ */
+Oid
+get_namespace_tablespace(Oid nspid)
+{
+ HeapTuple tp;
+
+ tp = SearchSysCache(NAMESPACEOID,
+ ObjectIdGetDatum(nspid),
+ 0, 0, 0);
+ if (HeapTupleIsValid(tp))
+ {
+ Form_pg_namespace nsptup = (Form_pg_namespace) GETSTRUCT(tp);
+ Oid result;
+
+ result = nsptup->nsptablespace;
+ ReleaseSysCache(tp);
+ return result;
+ }
+ else
+ return InvalidOid;
+}
+
/* ---------- PG_SHADOW CACHE ---------- */
/*
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/cache/relcache.c,v 1.204 2004/05/30 23:40:37 neilc Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/cache/relcache.c,v 1.205 2004/06/18 06:13:52 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
Relation relation);
static Relation RelationBuildDesc(RelationBuildDescInfo buildinfo,
Relation oldrelation);
+static void RelationInitPhysicalAddr(Relation relation);
static void AttrDefaultFetch(Relation relation);
static void CheckConstraintFetch(Relation relation);
static List *insert_ordered_oid(List *list, Oid datum);
*/
RelationInitLockInfo(relation); /* see lmgr.c */
- if (relation->rd_rel->relisshared)
- relation->rd_node.tblNode = InvalidOid;
- else
- relation->rd_node.tblNode = MyDatabaseId;
- relation->rd_node.relNode = relation->rd_rel->relfilenode;
+ /*
+ * initialize physical addressing information for the relation
+ */
+ RelationInitPhysicalAddr(relation);
/* make sure relation is marked as having no open file yet */
relation->rd_smgr = NULL;
return relation;
}
+/*
+ * Initialize the physical addressing info (RelFileNode) for a relcache entry
+ */
+static void
+RelationInitPhysicalAddr(Relation relation)
+{
+ if (relation->rd_rel->reltablespace)
+ relation->rd_node.spcNode = relation->rd_rel->reltablespace;
+ else
+ relation->rd_node.spcNode = MyDatabaseTableSpace;
+ if (relation->rd_rel->relisshared)
+ relation->rd_node.dbNode = InvalidOid;
+ else
+ relation->rd_node.dbNode = MyDatabaseId;
+ relation->rd_node.relNode = relation->rd_rel->relfilenode;
+}
+
/*
* Initialize index-access-method support data for an index relation
*/
* initialize relation id from info in att array (my, this is ugly)
*/
RelationGetRelid(relation) = relation->rd_att->attrs[0]->attrelid;
+ relation->rd_rel->relfilenode = RelationGetRelid(relation);
/*
- * initialize the relation's lock manager and RelFileNode information
+ * initialize the relation lock manager information
*/
RelationInitLockInfo(relation); /* see lmgr.c */
- if (relation->rd_rel->relisshared)
- relation->rd_node.tblNode = InvalidOid;
- else
- relation->rd_node.tblNode = MyDatabaseId;
- relation->rd_node.relNode =
- relation->rd_rel->relfilenode = RelationGetRelid(relation);
+ /*
+ * initialize physical addressing information for the relation
+ */
+ RelationInitPhysicalAddr(relation);
/*
* initialize the rel-has-index flag, using hardwired knowledge
relation->rd_id);
relp = (Form_pg_class) GETSTRUCT(pg_class_tuple);
memcpy((char *) relation->rd_rel, (char *) relp, CLASS_TUPLE_SIZE);
- relation->rd_node.relNode = relp->relfilenode;
+ /* Now we can recalculate physical address */
+ RelationInitPhysicalAddr(relation);
heap_freetuple(pg_class_tuple);
relation->rd_targblock = InvalidBlockNumber;
/* Okay, now it's valid again */
RelationBuildLocalRelation(const char *relname,
Oid relnamespace,
TupleDesc tupDesc,
- Oid relid, Oid dbid,
- RelFileNode rnode,
+ Oid relid,
+ Oid reltablespace,
+ bool shared_relation,
bool nailit)
{
Relation rel;
/*
* Insert relation physical and logical identifiers (OIDs) into the
- * right places.
+ * right places. Note that the physical ID (relfilenode) is initially
+ * the same as the logical ID (OID).
*/
- rel->rd_rel->relisshared = (dbid == InvalidOid);
+ rel->rd_rel->relisshared = shared_relation;
RelationGetRelid(rel) = relid;
for (i = 0; i < natts; i++)
rel->rd_att->attrs[i]->attrelid = relid;
- rel->rd_node = rnode;
- rel->rd_rel->relfilenode = rnode.relNode;
+ rel->rd_rel->relfilenode = relid;
+ rel->rd_rel->reltablespace = reltablespace;
RelationInitLockInfo(rel); /* see lmgr.c */
+ RelationInitPhysicalAddr(rel);
+
/*
* Okay to insert into the relcache hash tables.
*/
MemSet(&rel->pgstat_info, 0, sizeof(rel->pgstat_info));
/*
- * Make sure database ID is correct. This is needed in case the
- * pg_internal.init file was copied from some other database by
- * CREATE DATABASE.
+ * Recompute lock and physical addressing info. This is needed in
+ * case the pg_internal.init file was copied from some other database
+ * by CREATE DATABASE.
*/
- if (rel->rd_rel->relisshared)
- rel->rd_node.tblNode = InvalidOid;
- else
- rel->rd_node.tblNode = MyDatabaseId;
-
RelationInitLockInfo(rel);
+ RelationInitPhysicalAddr(rel);
}
/*
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/init/globals.c,v 1.90 2004/05/30 17:58:12 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/init/globals.c,v 1.91 2004/06/18 06:13:54 tgl Exp $
*
* NOTES
* Globals used all over the place should be declared here and not
char *DatabasePath = NULL;
Oid MyDatabaseId = InvalidOid;
+Oid MyDatabaseTableSpace = InvalidOid;
+
pid_t PostmasterPid = 0;
/*
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/init/miscinit.c,v 1.126 2004/05/30 23:40:38 neilc Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/init/miscinit.c,v 1.127 2004/06/18 06:13:54 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
SetDataDir(const char *dir)
{
char *new;
- int newlen;
AssertArg(dir);
* Strip any trailing slash. Not strictly necessary, but avoids
* generating funny-looking paths to individual files.
*/
- newlen = strlen(new);
- if (newlen > 1 && (new[newlen - 1] == '/'
-#ifdef WIN32
- || new[newlen - 1] == '\\'
-#endif
- ))
- new[newlen - 1] = '\0';
+ canonicalize_path(new);
if (DataDir)
free(DataDir);
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/init/postinit.c,v 1.133 2004/05/29 22:48:21 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/init/postinit.c,v 1.134 2004/06/18 06:13:54 tgl Exp $
*
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
#include "catalog/namespace.h"
#include "catalog/pg_database.h"
#include "catalog/pg_shadow.h"
+#include "catalog/pg_tablespace.h"
#include "commands/trigger.h"
#include "mb/pg_wchar.h"
#include "miscadmin.h"
if (bootstrap)
{
MyDatabaseId = TemplateDbOid;
- SetDatabasePath(GetDatabasePath(MyDatabaseId));
+ MyDatabaseTableSpace = DEFAULTTABLESPACE_OID;
+ SetDatabasePath(GetDatabasePath(MyDatabaseId, MyDatabaseTableSpace));
}
else
{
- char *fullpath,
- datpath[MAXPGPATH];
+ char *fullpath;
/*
* Formerly we validated DataDir here, but now that's done
*/
/*
- * Find oid and path of the database we're about to open. Since
- * we're not yet up and running we have to use the hackish
+ * Find oid and tablespace of the database we're about to open.
+ * Since we're not yet up and running we have to use the hackish
* GetRawDatabaseInfo.
*/
- GetRawDatabaseInfo(dbname, &MyDatabaseId, datpath);
+ GetRawDatabaseInfo(dbname, &MyDatabaseId, &MyDatabaseTableSpace);
if (!OidIsValid(MyDatabaseId))
ereport(FATAL,
errmsg("database \"%s\" does not exist",
dbname)));
- fullpath = GetDatabasePath(MyDatabaseId);
+ fullpath = GetDatabasePath(MyDatabaseId, MyDatabaseTableSpace);
/* Verify the database path */
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/misc/database.c,v 1.60 2004/01/22 20:57:39 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/misc/database.c,v 1.61 2004/06/18 06:13:56 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#include "catalog/catname.h"
#include "catalog/catalog.h"
#include "catalog/pg_database.h"
+#include "catalog/pg_tablespace.h"
#include "miscadmin.h"
#include "utils/syscache.h"
/* --------------------------------
- * GetRawDatabaseInfo() -- Find the OID and path of the database.
+ * GetRawDatabaseInfo() -- Find the OID and tablespace of the database.
*
- * The database's oid forms half of the unique key for the system
- * caches and lock tables. We therefore want it initialized before
- * we open any relations, since opening relations puts things in the
- * cache. To get around this problem, this code opens and scans the
+ * We need both the OID and the default tablespace in order to find
+ * the database's system catalogs. Moreover the database's OID forms
+ * half of the unique key for the system caches and lock tables, so
+ * we must have it before we can use any of the cache mechanisms.
+ * To get around these problems, this code opens and scans the
* pg_database relation by hand.
*
* This code knows way more than it should about the layout of
* --------------------------------
*/
void
-GetRawDatabaseInfo(const char *name, Oid *db_id, char *path)
+GetRawDatabaseInfo(const char *name, Oid *db_id, Oid *db_tablespace)
{
int dbfd;
int nbytes;
- int pathlen;
HeapTupleData tup;
+ Form_pg_database tup_db;
Page pg;
char *dbfname;
- Form_pg_database tup_db;
RelFileNode rnode;
- rnode.tblNode = 0;
+ /* hard-wired path to pg_database */
+ rnode.spcNode = GLOBALTABLESPACE_OID;
+ rnode.dbNode = 0;
rnode.relNode = RelOid_pg_database;
+
dbfname = relpath(rnode);
if ((dbfd = open(dbfname, O_RDONLY | PG_BINARY, 0)) < 0)
* committed and dead tuples to be marked with correct states.
*
* XXX wouldn't it be better to let new backends read the
- * database OID from a flat file, handled the same way we
+ * database info from a flat file, handled the same way we
* handle the password relation?
*/
if (!PhonyHeapTupleSatisfiesNow(tup.t_data))
if (strcmp(name, NameStr(tup_db->datname)) == 0)
{
- /* Found it; extract the OID and the database path. */
+ /* Found it; extract the db's OID and tablespace. */
*db_id = HeapTupleGetOid(&tup);
- pathlen = VARSIZE(&(tup_db->datpath)) - VARHDRSZ;
- if (pathlen < 0)
- pathlen = 0; /* pure paranoia */
- if (pathlen >= MAXPGPATH)
- pathlen = MAXPGPATH - 1; /* more paranoia */
- strncpy(path, VARDATA(&(tup_db->datpath)), pathlen);
- path[pathlen] = '\0';
+ *db_tablespace = tup_db->dattablespace;
goto done;
}
}
/* failed to find it... */
*db_id = InvalidOid;
- *path = '\0';
+ *db_tablespace = InvalidOid;
done:
close(dbfd);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
* Portions taken from FreeBSD.
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/initdb/initdb.c,v 1.37 2004/06/10 22:26:20 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/initdb/initdb.c,v 1.38 2004/06/18 06:13:58 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
char *pgdenv; /* PGDATA value got from sent to
* environment */
char *subdirs[] =
- {"global", "pg_xlog", "pg_clog", "base", "base/1"};
+ {"global", "pg_xlog", "pg_clog", "base", "base/1", "pg_tablespaces"};
progname = get_progname(argv[0]);
set_pglocale_pgservice(argv[0], "initdb");
/* Bootstrap template1 */
bootstrap_template1(short_version);
- /* Make the per-database PGVERSION for template1 only after init'ing it */
+ /* Make the per-database PG_VERSION for template1 only after init'ing it */
set_short_version(short_version, "base/1");
/* Create the stuff we don't need to use bootstrap mode for */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2003, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/dumputils.c,v 1.12 2004/03/23 22:06:08 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/dumputils.c,v 1.13 2004/06/18 06:14:00 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
* Convert a string value to a dollar quoted literal and append it to
- * the given buffer. If the dqprefix parameter is not NULL then the
+ * the given buffer. If the dqprefix parameter is not NULL then the
* dollar quote delimiter will begin with that (after the opening $).
*
* No escaping is done at all on str, in compliance with the rules
if (dqprefix)
appendPQExpBuffer(delimBuf, dqprefix);
- /*
+ /*
* Make sure we choose a delimiter which (without the trailing $)
* is not present in the string being quoted. We don't check with the
* trailing $ because a string ending in $foo must not be quoted with
* otherwise use standard quoting.
*/
void
-appendStringLiteralDQOpt(PQExpBuffer buf, const char *str,
+appendStringLiteralDQOpt(PQExpBuffer buf, const char *str,
bool escapeAll, const char *dqprefix)
{
if (strchr(str, '\'') == NULL && strchr(str, '\\') == NULL)
CONVERT_PRIV('C', "CREATE");
CONVERT_PRIV('T', "TEMPORARY");
}
+ else if (strcmp(type, "TABLESPACE") == 0)
+ CONVERT_PRIV('C', "CREATE");
else
abort();
appendPQExpBufferChar(output, *input++);
else
{
- /* Otherwise, it's a quoted username */
+ /* Otherwise, it's a quoted username */
input++;
/* Loop until we come across an unescaped quote */
while (!(*input == '"' && *(input + 1) != '"'))
* by PostgreSQL
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dump.c,v 1.374 2004/06/07 20:35:57 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dump.c,v 1.375 2004/06/18 06:14:00 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
i_oid,
i_dba,
i_encoding,
- i_datpath;
+ i_tablespace;
CatalogId dbCatId;
DumpId dbDumpId;
const char *datname,
*dba,
*encoding,
- *datpath;
+ *tablespace;
datname = PQdb(g_conn);
selectSourceSchema("pg_catalog");
/* Get the database owner and parameters from pg_database */
- if (g_fout->remoteVersion >= 70100)
+ if (g_fout->remoteVersion >= 70500)
{
appendPQExpBuffer(dbQry, "SELECT tableoid, oid, "
"(SELECT usename FROM pg_user WHERE usesysid = datdba) as dba, "
"pg_encoding_to_char(encoding) as encoding, "
- "datpath "
+ "(SELECT spcname FROM pg_tablespace t WHERE t.oid = dattablespace) as tablespace "
+ "FROM pg_database "
+ "WHERE datname = ");
+ appendStringLiteral(dbQry, datname, true);
+ }
+ else if (g_fout->remoteVersion >= 70100)
+ {
+ appendPQExpBuffer(dbQry, "SELECT tableoid, oid, "
+ "(SELECT usename FROM pg_user WHERE usesysid = datdba) as dba, "
+ "pg_encoding_to_char(encoding) as encoding, "
+ "NULL as tablespace "
"FROM pg_database "
"WHERE datname = ");
appendStringLiteral(dbQry, datname, true);
}
else
{
- /*
- * In 7.0, datpath is either the same as datname, or the user-given
- * location with "/" and the datname appended. We must strip this
- * junk off to produce a correct LOCATION value.
- */
appendPQExpBuffer(dbQry, "SELECT "
"(SELECT oid FROM pg_class WHERE relname = 'pg_database') AS tableoid, "
"oid, "
"(SELECT usename FROM pg_user WHERE usesysid = datdba) as dba, "
"pg_encoding_to_char(encoding) as encoding, "
- "CASE WHEN length(datpath) > length(datname) THEN "
- "substr(datpath,1,length(datpath)-length(datname)-1) "
- "ELSE '' END as datpath "
+ "NULL as tablespace "
"FROM pg_database "
"WHERE datname = ");
appendStringLiteral(dbQry, datname, true);
i_oid = PQfnumber(res, "oid");
i_dba = PQfnumber(res, "dba");
i_encoding = PQfnumber(res, "encoding");
- i_datpath = PQfnumber(res, "datpath");
+ i_tablespace = PQfnumber(res, "tablespace");
dbCatId.tableoid = atooid(PQgetvalue(res, 0, i_tableoid));
dbCatId.oid = atooid(PQgetvalue(res, 0, i_oid));
dba = PQgetvalue(res, 0, i_dba);
encoding = PQgetvalue(res, 0, i_encoding);
- datpath = PQgetvalue(res, 0, i_datpath);
+ tablespace = PQgetvalue(res, 0, i_tablespace);
appendPQExpBuffer(creaQry, "CREATE DATABASE %s WITH TEMPLATE = template0",
fmtId(datname));
- if (strlen(datpath) > 0)
- {
- appendPQExpBuffer(creaQry, " LOCATION = ");
- appendStringLiteral(creaQry, datpath, true);
- }
if (strlen(encoding) > 0)
{
appendPQExpBuffer(creaQry, " ENCODING = ");
appendStringLiteral(creaQry, encoding, true);
}
+ if (strlen(tablespace) > 0 && strcmp(tablespace, "default") != 0)
+ {
+ appendPQExpBuffer(creaQry, " TABLESPACE = %s", fmtId(tablespace));
+ }
appendPQExpBuffer(creaQry, ";\n");
appendPQExpBuffer(delQry, "DROP DATABASE %s;\n",
if (strftime(buf, 256, "%Y-%m-%d %H:%M:%S %Z", localtime(&now)) != 0)
{
PQExpBuffer qry = createPQExpBuffer();
-
+
appendPQExpBuffer(qry, "-- ");
appendPQExpBuffer(qry, msg);
appendPQExpBuffer(qry, " ");
int i_oid;
int i_nspname;
int i_usename;
+ int i_nsptablespace;
int i_nspacl;
/*
nsinfo[0].dobj.name = strdup("");
nsinfo[0].usename = strdup("");
nsinfo[0].nspacl = strdup("");
+ nsinfo[0].nsptablespace = strdup("");
selectDumpableNamespace(&nsinfo[0]);
nsinfo[1].dobj.name = strdup("pg_catalog");
nsinfo[1].usename = strdup("");
nsinfo[1].nspacl = strdup("");
+ nsinfo[0].nsptablespace = strdup("");
selectDumpableNamespace(&nsinfo[1]);
* we fetch all namespaces including system ones, so that every object
* we read in can be linked to a containing namespace.
*/
- appendPQExpBuffer(query, "SELECT tableoid, oid, nspname, "
- "(select usename from pg_user where nspowner = usesysid) as usename, "
- "nspacl "
- "FROM pg_namespace");
+ if (g_fout->remoteVersion >= 70500)
+ {
+ appendPQExpBuffer(query, "SELECT tableoid, oid, nspname, "
+ "(select usename from pg_user where nspowner = usesysid) as usename, "
+ "nspacl, "
+ "(SELECT spcname FROM pg_tablespace t WHERE t.oid = nsptablespace) AS nsptablespace "
+ "FROM pg_namespace");
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ appendPQExpBuffer(query, "SELECT tableoid, oid, nspname, "
+ "(select usename from pg_user where nspowner = usesysid) as usename, "
+ "nspacl, NULL AS nsptablespace "
+ "FROM pg_namespace");
+ }
res = PQexec(g_conn, query->data);
check_sql_result(res, g_conn, query->data, PGRES_TUPLES_OK);
i_nspname = PQfnumber(res, "nspname");
i_usename = PQfnumber(res, "usename");
i_nspacl = PQfnumber(res, "nspacl");
+ i_nsptablespace = PQfnumber(res, "nsptablespace");
for (i = 0; i < ntups; i++)
{
nsinfo[i].dobj.name = strdup(PQgetvalue(res, i, i_nspname));
nsinfo[i].usename = strdup(PQgetvalue(res, i, i_usename));
nsinfo[i].nspacl = strdup(PQgetvalue(res, i, i_nspacl));
+ nsinfo[i].nsptablespace = strdup(PQgetvalue(res, i, i_nsptablespace));
/* Decide whether to dump this namespace */
selectDumpableNamespace(&nsinfo[i]);
int i_relhasoids;
int i_owning_tab;
int i_owning_col;
+ int i_reltablespace;
/* Make sure we are in proper schema */
selectSourceSchema("pg_catalog");
* columns, etc.
*/
- if (g_fout->remoteVersion >= 70300)
+ if (g_fout->remoteVersion >= 70500)
{
/*
* Left join to pick up dependency info linking sequences to their
"relchecks, reltriggers, "
"relhasindex, relhasrules, relhasoids, "
"d.refobjid as owning_tab, "
- "d.refobjsubid as owning_col "
+ "d.refobjsubid as owning_col, "
+ "(SELECT spcname FROM pg_tablespace t WHERE t.oid = c.reltablespace) AS reltablespace "
+ "from pg_class c "
+ "left join pg_depend d on "
+ "(c.relkind = '%c' and "
+ "d.classid = c.tableoid and d.objid = c.oid and "
+ "d.objsubid = 0 and "
+ "d.refclassid = c.tableoid and d.deptype = 'i') "
+ "where relkind in ('%c', '%c', '%c') "
+ "order by c.oid",
+ RELKIND_SEQUENCE,
+ RELKIND_RELATION, RELKIND_SEQUENCE, RELKIND_VIEW);
+ }
+ else if (g_fout->remoteVersion >= 70300)
+ {
+ /*
+ * Left join to pick up dependency info linking sequences to their
+ * serial column, if any
+ */
+ appendPQExpBuffer(query,
+ "SELECT c.tableoid, c.oid, relname, "
+ "relacl, relkind, relnamespace, "
+ "(select usename from pg_user where relowner = usesysid) as usename, "
+ "relchecks, reltriggers, "
+ "relhasindex, relhasrules, relhasoids, "
+ "d.refobjid as owning_tab, "
+ "d.refobjsubid as owning_col, "
+ "NULL as reltablespace "
"from pg_class c "
"left join pg_depend d on "
"(c.relkind = '%c' and "
"relchecks, reltriggers, "
"relhasindex, relhasrules, relhasoids, "
"NULL::oid as owning_tab, "
- "NULL::int4 as owning_col "
+ "NULL::int4 as owning_col, "
+ "NULL as reltablespace "
"from pg_class "
"where relkind in ('%c', '%c', '%c') "
"order by oid",
"relhasindex, relhasrules, "
"'t'::bool as relhasoids, "
"NULL::oid as owning_tab, "
- "NULL::int4 as owning_col "
+ "NULL::int4 as owning_col, "
+ "NULL as reltablespace "
"from pg_class "
"where relkind in ('%c', '%c', '%c') "
"order by oid",
"relhasindex, relhasrules, "
"'t'::bool as relhasoids, "
"NULL::oid as owning_tab, "
- "NULL::int4 as owning_col "
+ "NULL::int4 as owning_col, "
+ "NULL as reltablespace "
"from pg_class c "
"where relkind in ('%c', '%c') "
"order by oid",
i_relhasoids = PQfnumber(res, "relhasoids");
i_owning_tab = PQfnumber(res, "owning_tab");
i_owning_col = PQfnumber(res, "owning_col");
+ i_reltablespace = PQfnumber(res, "reltablespace");
for (i = 0; i < ntups; i++)
{
tblinfo[i].owning_tab = atooid(PQgetvalue(res, i, i_owning_tab));
tblinfo[i].owning_col = atoi(PQgetvalue(res, i, i_owning_col));
}
+ tblinfo[i].reltablespace = strdup(PQgetvalue(res, i, i_reltablespace));
/* other fields were zeroed above */
indxinfo[j].indextable = tbinfo;
indxinfo[j].indexdef = strdup(PQgetvalue(res, j, i_indexdef));
indxinfo[j].indnkeys = atoi(PQgetvalue(res, j, i_indnkeys));
+
/*
* In pre-7.4 releases, indkeys may contain more entries than
* indnkeys says (since indnkeys will be 1 for a functional
constrinfo[j].conindex = indxinfo[j].dobj.dumpId;
constrinfo[j].coninherited = false;
constrinfo[j].separate = true;
-
+
indxinfo[j].indexconstraint = constrinfo[j].dobj.dumpId;
/* If pre-7.3 DB, better make sure table comes first */
{
appendPQExpBuffer(delq, "DROP SCHEMA %s;\n", qnspname);
- appendPQExpBuffer(q, "CREATE SCHEMA %s AUTHORIZATION %s;\n",
+ appendPQExpBuffer(q, "CREATE SCHEMA %s AUTHORIZATION %s",
qnspname, fmtId(nspinfo->usename));
+ /* Add tablespace qualifier, if not default */
+ if (strlen(nspinfo->nsptablespace) != 0)
+ appendPQExpBuffer(q, " TABLESPACE %s",
+ fmtId(nspinfo->nsptablespace));
+
+ appendPQExpBuffer(q, ";\n");
+
ArchiveEntry(fout, nspinfo->dobj.catId, nspinfo->dobj.dumpId,
nspinfo->dobj.name,
NULL, "",
if (strcmp(prosrc, "-") != 0)
{
appendPQExpBuffer(asPart, ", ");
- /*
+ /*
* where we have bin, use dollar quoting if allowed and src
* contains quote or backslash; else use regular quoting.
*/
* Skip cast if function isn't from pg_ and that namespace is
* not dumped.
*/
- if (funcInfo &&
+ if (funcInfo &&
strncmp(funcInfo->dobj.namespace->dobj.name, "pg_", 3) != 0 &&
!funcInfo->dobj.namespace->dump)
return;
fmtId(convinfo->dobj.name));
appendPQExpBuffer(q, "CREATE %sCONVERSION %s FOR ",
- (condefault) ? "DEFAULT " : "",
+ (condefault) ? "DEFAULT " : "",
fmtId(convinfo->dobj.name));
appendStringLiteral(q, conforencoding, true);
appendPQExpBuffer(q, " TO ");
appendStringLiteral(q, contoencoding, true);
/* regproc is automatically quoted in 7.3 and above */
appendPQExpBuffer(q, " FROM %s;\n", conproc);
-
+
ArchiveEntry(fout, convinfo->dobj.catId, convinfo->dobj.dumpId,
convinfo->dobj.name,
convinfo->dobj.namespace->dobj.name, convinfo->usename,
appendPQExpBuffer(q, ")");
}
+ /* Output tablespace clause if necessary */
+ if (strlen(tbinfo->reltablespace) != 0 &&
+ strcmp(tbinfo->reltablespace,
+ tbinfo->dobj.namespace->nsptablespace) != 0)
+ {
+ appendPQExpBuffer(q, " TABLESPACE %s",
+ fmtId(tbinfo->reltablespace));
+ }
+
appendPQExpBuffer(q, ";\n");
/* Loop dumping statistics and storage statements */
appendPQExpBuffer(query, " NO MINVALUE\n");
appendPQExpBuffer(query,
- " CACHE %s%s;\n",
+ " CACHE %s%s",
cache, (cycled ? "\n CYCLE" : ""));
+ /* Output tablespace clause if necessary */
+ if (strlen(tbinfo->reltablespace) != 0 &&
+ strcmp(tbinfo->reltablespace,
+ tbinfo->dobj.namespace->nsptablespace) != 0)
+ {
+ appendPQExpBuffer(query, " TABLESPACE %s",
+ fmtId(tbinfo->reltablespace));
+ }
+
+ appendPQExpBuffer(query, ";\n");
+
ArchiveEntry(fout, tbinfo->dobj.catId, tbinfo->dobj.dumpId,
tbinfo->dobj.name,
tbinfo->dobj.namespace->dobj.name, tbinfo->usename,
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2003, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dump.h,v 1.108 2004/03/03 21:28:55 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dump.h,v 1.109 2004/06/18 06:14:00 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
DumpableObject dobj;
char *usename; /* name of owner, or empty string */
char *nspacl;
+ char *nsptablespace; /* default tablespace */
bool dump; /* true if need to dump definition */
} NamespaceInfo;
char *usename; /* name of owner, or empty string */
char *relacl;
char relkind;
+ char *reltablespace; /* relation tablespace */
bool hasindex; /* does it have any indexes? */
bool hasrules; /* does it have any rules? */
bool hasoids; /* does it have OIDs? */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dumpall.c,v 1.41 2004/06/10 16:35:17 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dumpall.c,v 1.42 2004/06/18 06:14:00 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void dumpUsers(PGconn *conn);
static void dumpGroups(PGconn *conn);
+static void dumpTablespaces(PGconn *conn);
static void dumpCreateDB(PGconn *conn);
static void dumpDatabaseConfig(PGconn *conn, const char *dbname);
static void dumpUserConfig(PGconn *conn, const char *username);
{
dumpUsers(conn);
dumpGroups(conn);
+ if (server_version >= 70500)
+ dumpTablespaces(conn);
}
if (!globals_only)
printf("\n\n");
}
+/*
+ * Dump tablespaces.
+ */
+static void
+dumpTablespaces(PGconn *conn)
+{
+ PGresult *res;
+ int i;
+
+ printf("--\n-- Tablespaces\n--\n\n");
+
+ /*
+ * Get all tablespaces except for the system default and global
+ * tablespaces
+ */
+ res = executeQuery(conn, "SELECT spcname, "
+ "pg_catalog.pg_get_userbyid(spcowner) AS spcowner, "
+ "spclocation, spcacl "
+ "FROM pg_catalog.pg_tablespace "
+ "WHERE spcname NOT IN ('default', 'global')");
+
+ for (i = 0; i < PQntuples(res); i++)
+ {
+ PQExpBuffer buf = createPQExpBuffer();
+ char *spcname = PQgetvalue(res, i, 0);
+ char *spcowner = PQgetvalue(res, i, 1);
+ char *spclocation = PQgetvalue(res, i, 2);
+ char *spcacl = PQgetvalue(res, i, 3);
+ char *fspcname;
+
+ /* needed for buildACLCommands() */
+ fspcname = strdup(fmtId(spcname));
+
+ if (output_clean)
+ appendPQExpBuffer(buf, "DROP TABLESPACE %s;\n", fspcname);
+
+ appendPQExpBuffer(buf, "CREATE TABLESPACE %s", fspcname);
+ appendPQExpBuffer(buf, " OWNER %s", fmtId(spcowner));
+
+ appendPQExpBuffer(buf, " LOCATION ");
+ appendStringLiteral(buf, spclocation, true);
+ appendPQExpBuffer(buf, ";\n");
+
+ if (!skip_acls &&
+ !buildACLCommands(fspcname, "TABLESPACE", spcacl, spcowner,
+ server_version, buf))
+ {
+ fprintf(stderr, _("%s: could not parse ACL list (%s) for tablespace \"%s\"\n"),
+ progname, spcacl, fspcname);
+ PQfinish(conn);
+ exit(1);
+ }
+
+ printf("%s", buf->data);
+ free(fspcname);
+ destroyPQExpBuffer(buf);
+ }
+
+ PQclear(res);
+ printf("\n\n");
+}
/*
* Dump commands to create each database.
printf("--\n-- Database creation\n--\n\n");
- if (server_version >= 70300)
+ if (server_version >= 70500)
res = executeQuery(conn,
"SELECT datname, "
"coalesce(usename, (select usename from pg_shadow where usesysid=(select datdba from pg_database where datname='template0'))), "
"pg_encoding_to_char(d.encoding), "
- "datistemplate, datpath, datacl "
+ "datistemplate, datacl, "
+ "(SELECT spcname FROM pg_tablespace t WHERE t.oid = d.dattablespace) AS dattablespace "
+ "FROM pg_database d LEFT JOIN pg_shadow u ON (datdba = usesysid) "
+ "WHERE datallowconn ORDER BY 1");
+ else if (server_version >= 70300)
+ res = executeQuery(conn,
+ "SELECT datname, "
+ "coalesce(usename, (select usename from pg_shadow where usesysid=(select datdba from pg_database where datname='template0'))), "
+ "pg_encoding_to_char(d.encoding), "
+ "datistemplate, datacl, "
+ "'default' AS dattablespace "
"FROM pg_database d LEFT JOIN pg_shadow u ON (datdba = usesysid) "
"WHERE datallowconn ORDER BY 1");
else if (server_version >= 70100)
"(select usename from pg_shadow where usesysid=datdba), "
"(select usename from pg_shadow where usesysid=(select datdba from pg_database where datname='template0'))), "
"pg_encoding_to_char(d.encoding), "
- "datistemplate, datpath, '' as datacl "
+ "datistemplate, '' as datacl, "
+ "'default' AS dattablespace "
"FROM pg_database d "
"WHERE datallowconn ORDER BY 1");
else
{
/*
- * In 7.0, datpath is either the same as datname, or the user-given
- * location with "/" and the datname appended. We must strip this
- * junk off to produce a correct LOCATION value.
- *
* Note: 7.0 fails to cope with sub-select in COALESCE, so just
* deal with getting a NULL by not printing any OWNER clause.
*/
"(select usename from pg_shadow where usesysid=datdba), "
"pg_encoding_to_char(d.encoding), "
"'f' as datistemplate, "
- "CASE WHEN length(datpath) > length(datname) THEN "
- "substr(datpath,1,length(datpath)-length(datname)-1) "
- "ELSE '' END as datpath, "
- "'' as datacl "
+ "'' as datacl, "
+ "'default' AS dattablespace "
"FROM pg_database d "
"ORDER BY 1");
}
char *dbowner = PQgetvalue(res, i, 1);
char *dbencoding = PQgetvalue(res, i, 2);
char *dbistemplate = PQgetvalue(res, i, 3);
- char *dbpath = PQgetvalue(res, i, 4);
- char *dbacl = PQgetvalue(res, i, 5);
+ char *dbacl = PQgetvalue(res, i, 4);
+ char *dbtablespace = PQgetvalue(res, i, 5);
char *fdbname;
if (strcmp(dbname, "template1") == 0)
appendPQExpBuffer(buf, "DROP DATABASE %s;\n", fdbname);
appendPQExpBuffer(buf, "CREATE DATABASE %s", fdbname);
+
+ appendPQExpBuffer(buf, " WITH TEMPLATE = template0");
+
if (strlen(dbowner) != 0)
- appendPQExpBuffer(buf, " WITH OWNER = %s",
+ appendPQExpBuffer(buf, " OWNER = %s",
fmtId(dbowner));
- appendPQExpBuffer(buf, " TEMPLATE = template0");
-
- if (strlen(dbpath) != 0)
- {
- appendPQExpBuffer(buf, " LOCATION = ");
- appendStringLiteral(buf, dbpath, true);
- }
appendPQExpBuffer(buf, " ENCODING = ");
appendStringLiteral(buf, dbencoding, true);
+ /* Output tablespace if it isn't default */
+ if (strcmp(dbtablespace, "default") != 0)
+ appendPQExpBuffer(buf, " TABLESPACE = %s",
+ fmtId(dbtablespace));
+
appendPQExpBuffer(buf, ";\n");
if (strcmp(dbistemplate, "t") == 0)
*
* Copyright (c) 2000-2003, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/command.c,v 1.116 2004/05/07 00:24:58 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/command.c,v 1.117 2004/06/18 06:14:04 tgl Exp $
*/
#include "postgres_fe.h"
#include "command.h"
case 'a':
success = describeAggregates(pattern, show_verbose);
break;
+ case 'b':
+ success = describeTablespaces(pattern);
+ break;
case 'c':
success = listConversions(pattern);
break;
*
* Copyright (c) 2000-2003, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/describe.c,v 1.98 2004/05/07 00:24:58 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/describe.c,v 1.99 2004/06/18 06:14:04 tgl Exp $
*/
#include "postgres_fe.h"
#include "describe.h"
return true;
}
+/* \db
+ * Takes an optional regexp to select particular tablespaces
+ */
+bool
+describeTablespaces(const char *pattern)
+{
+ PQExpBufferData buf;
+ PGresult *res;
+ printQueryOpt myopt = pset.popt;
+
+ initPQExpBuffer(&buf);
+
+ printfPQExpBuffer(&buf,
+ "SELECT spcname AS \"%s\",\n"
+ " pg_catalog.pg_get_userbyid(spcowner) AS \"%s\",\n"
+ " spclocation AS \"%s\"\n"
+ "FROM pg_catalog.pg_tablespace\n",
+ _("Name"), _("Owner"), _("Location"));
+
+ processNamePattern(&buf, pattern, false, false,
+ NULL, "spcname", NULL,
+ NULL);
+
+ appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, "ORDER BY 1;");
+
+ res = PSQLexec(buf.data, false);
+ termPQExpBuffer(&buf);
+ if (!res)
+ return false;
+
+ myopt.nullPrint = NULL;
+ myopt.title = _("List of tablespaces");
+
+ printQuery(res, &myopt, pset.queryFout);
+
+ PQclear(res);
+ return true;
+}
+
/* \df
* Takes an optional regexp to select particular functions
printfPQExpBuffer(&buf,
"SELECT n.nspname as \"%s\",\n"
" c.relname as \"%s\",\n"
- " CASE c.relkind WHEN 'r' THEN '%s' WHEN 'v' THEN '%s' WHEN 'S' THEN '%s' END as \"%s\",\n"
+ " CASE c.relkind WHEN 'r' THEN '%s' WHEN 'v' THEN '%s' WHEN 'S' THEN '%s' END as \"%s\",\n"
" c.relacl as \"%s\"\n"
"FROM pg_catalog.pg_class c\n"
" LEFT JOIN pg_catalog.pg_namespace n ON n.oid = c.relnamespace\n"
*
* Copyright (c) 2000-2003, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/describe.h,v 1.23 2003/12/01 22:21:54 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/describe.h,v 1.24 2004/06/18 06:14:04 tgl Exp $
*/
#ifndef DESCRIBE_H
#define DESCRIBE_H
/* \da */
bool describeAggregates(const char *pattern, bool verbose);
+/* \db */
+bool describeTablespaces(const char *pattern);
+
/* \df */
bool describeFunctions(const char *pattern, bool verbose);
*
* Copyright (c) 2000-2003, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/help.c,v 1.87 2004/05/07 00:24:58 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/help.c,v 1.88 2004/06/18 06:14:04 tgl Exp $
*/
#include "postgres_fe.h"
#include "common.h"
fprintf(output, _(" \\d{t|i|s|v|S} [PATTERN] (add \"+\" for more detail)\n"
" list tables/indexes/sequences/views/system tables\n"));
fprintf(output, _(" \\da [PATTERN] list aggregate functions\n"));
+ fprintf(output, _(" \\db [PATTERN] list tablespaces\n"));
fprintf(output, _(" \\dc [PATTERN] list conversions\n"));
fprintf(output, _(" \\dC list casts\n"));
fprintf(output, _(" \\dd [PATTERN] show comment for object\n"));
size_t len;
int nl_count = 0;
char *ch;
-
+
/* don't care about trailing spaces */
len = strlen(topic);
while (topic[len - 1] == ' ')
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2003, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/catalog.h,v 1.27 2003/11/29 22:40:58 pgsql Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/catalog.h,v 1.28 2004/06/18 06:14:05 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern char *relpath(RelFileNode rnode);
-extern char *GetDatabasePath(Oid tblNode);
+extern char *GetDatabasePath(Oid dbNode, Oid spcNode);
extern bool IsSystemRelation(Relation relation);
extern bool IsToastRelation(Relation relation);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2003, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/catname.h,v 1.31 2003/11/29 22:40:58 pgsql Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/catname.h,v 1.32 2004/06/18 06:14:05 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#define RewriteRelationName "pg_rewrite"
#define ShadowRelationName "pg_shadow"
#define StatisticRelationName "pg_statistic"
+#define TableSpaceRelationName "pg_tablespace"
#define TypeRelationName "pg_type"
#define VersionRelationName "pg_version"
#define AttrDefaultRelationName "pg_attrdef"
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2003, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/catversion.h,v 1.236 2004/06/16 01:26:49 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/catversion.h,v 1.237 2004/06/18 06:14:05 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
*/
/* yyyymmddN */
-#define CATALOG_VERSION_NO 200406151
+#define CATALOG_VERSION_NO 200406171
#endif
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2003, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/heap.h,v 1.66 2004/05/05 04:48:47 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/heap.h,v 1.67 2004/06/18 06:14:05 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern Relation heap_create(const char *relname,
Oid relnamespace,
+ Oid reltablespace,
TupleDesc tupDesc,
bool shared_relation,
bool storage_create,
extern Oid heap_create_with_catalog(const char *relname,
Oid relnamespace,
+ Oid reltablespace,
TupleDesc tupdesc,
char relkind,
bool shared_relation,
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2003, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/index.h,v 1.56 2004/05/08 00:34:49 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/index.h,v 1.57 2004/06/18 06:14:05 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
const char *indexRelationName,
IndexInfo *indexInfo,
Oid accessMethodObjectId,
+ Oid tableSpaceId,
Oid *classObjectId,
bool primary,
bool isconstraint,
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2003, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/indexing.h,v 1.81 2003/11/29 22:40:58 pgsql Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/indexing.h,v 1.82 2004/06/18 06:14:06 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#define ShadowNameIndex "pg_shadow_usename_index"
#define ShadowSysidIndex "pg_shadow_usesysid_index"
#define StatisticRelidAttnumIndex "pg_statistic_relid_att_index"
+#define TablespaceNameIndex "pg_tablespace_spcname_index"
+#define TablespaceOidIndex "pg_tablespace_oid_index"
#define TriggerConstrNameIndex "pg_trigger_tgconstrname_index"
#define TriggerConstrRelidIndex "pg_trigger_tgconstrrelid_index"
#define TriggerRelidNameIndex "pg_trigger_tgrelid_tgname_index"
DECLARE_UNIQUE_INDEX(pg_shadow_usename_index on pg_shadow using btree(usename name_ops));
DECLARE_UNIQUE_INDEX(pg_shadow_usesysid_index on pg_shadow using btree(usesysid int4_ops));
DECLARE_UNIQUE_INDEX(pg_statistic_relid_att_index on pg_statistic using btree(starelid oid_ops, staattnum int2_ops));
+DECLARE_UNIQUE_INDEX(pg_tablespace_oid_index on pg_tablespace using btree(oid oid_ops));
+DECLARE_UNIQUE_INDEX(pg_tablespace_spcname_index on pg_tablespace using btree(spcname name_ops));
/* This following index is not used for a cache and is not unique */
DECLARE_INDEX(pg_trigger_tgconstrname_index on pg_trigger using btree(tgconstrname name_ops));
/* This following index is not used for a cache and is not unique */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2003, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/pg_attribute.h,v 1.109 2004/04/01 21:28:45 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/pg_attribute.h,v 1.110 2004/06/18 06:14:06 tgl Exp $
*
* NOTES
* the genbki.sh script reads this file and generates .bki
*/
/* ----------------
- * pg_type schema
+ * pg_type
* ----------------
*/
#define Schema_pg_type \
DATA(insert ( 1262 datlastsysoid 26 -1 4 6 0 -1 -1 t p i t f f t 0));
DATA(insert ( 1262 datvacuumxid 28 -1 4 7 0 -1 -1 t p i t f f t 0));
DATA(insert ( 1262 datfrozenxid 28 -1 4 8 0 -1 -1 t p i t f f t 0));
-/* do not mark datpath as toastable; GetRawDatabaseInfo won't cope */
-DATA(insert ( 1262 datpath 25 -1 -1 9 0 -1 -1 f p i t f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1262 dattablespace 26 -1 4 9 0 -1 -1 t p i t f f t 0));
DATA(insert ( 1262 datconfig 1009 -1 -1 10 1 -1 -1 f x i f f f t 0));
DATA(insert ( 1262 datacl 1034 -1 -1 11 1 -1 -1 f x i f f f t 0));
DATA(insert ( 1262 ctid 27 0 6 -1 0 -1 -1 f p s t f f t 0));
{ 1259, {"relowner"}, 23, -1, 4, 4, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 'i', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
{ 1259, {"relam"}, 26, -1, 4, 5, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 'i', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
{ 1259, {"relfilenode"}, 26, -1, 4, 6, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 'i', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
-{ 1259, {"relpages"}, 23, -1, 4, 7, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 'i', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
-{ 1259, {"reltuples"}, 700, -1, 4, 8, 0, -1, -1, false, 'p', 'i', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
-{ 1259, {"reltoastrelid"}, 26, -1, 4, 9, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 'i', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
-{ 1259, {"reltoastidxid"}, 26, -1, 4, 10, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 'i', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
-{ 1259, {"relhasindex"}, 16, -1, 1, 11, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 'c', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
-{ 1259, {"relisshared"}, 16, -1, 1, 12, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 'c', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
-{ 1259, {"relkind"}, 18, -1, 1, 13, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 'c', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
-{ 1259, {"relnatts"}, 21, -1, 2, 14, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 's', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
-{ 1259, {"relchecks"}, 21, -1, 2, 15, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 's', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
-{ 1259, {"reltriggers"}, 21, -1, 2, 16, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 's', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
-{ 1259, {"relukeys"}, 21, -1, 2, 17, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 's', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
-{ 1259, {"relfkeys"}, 21, -1, 2, 18, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 's', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
-{ 1259, {"relrefs"}, 21, -1, 2, 19, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 's', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
-{ 1259, {"relhasoids"}, 16, -1, 1, 20, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 'c', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
-{ 1259, {"relhaspkey"}, 16, -1, 1, 21, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 'c', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
-{ 1259, {"relhasrules"}, 16, -1, 1, 22, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 'c', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
-{ 1259, {"relhassubclass"},16, -1, 1, 23, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 'c', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
-{ 1259, {"relacl"}, 1034, -1, -1, 24, 1, -1, -1, false, 'x', 'i', false, false, false, true, 0 }
+{ 1259, {"reltablespace"}, 26, -1, 4, 7, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 'i', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
+{ 1259, {"relpages"}, 23, -1, 4, 8, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 'i', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
+{ 1259, {"reltuples"}, 700, -1, 4, 9, 0, -1, -1, false, 'p', 'i', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
+{ 1259, {"reltoastrelid"}, 26, -1, 4, 10, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 'i', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
+{ 1259, {"reltoastidxid"}, 26, -1, 4, 11, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 'i', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
+{ 1259, {"relhasindex"}, 16, -1, 1, 12, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 'c', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
+{ 1259, {"relisshared"}, 16, -1, 1, 13, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 'c', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
+{ 1259, {"relkind"}, 18, -1, 1, 14, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 'c', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
+{ 1259, {"relnatts"}, 21, -1, 2, 15, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 's', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
+{ 1259, {"relchecks"}, 21, -1, 2, 16, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 's', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
+{ 1259, {"reltriggers"}, 21, -1, 2, 17, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 's', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
+{ 1259, {"relukeys"}, 21, -1, 2, 18, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 's', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
+{ 1259, {"relfkeys"}, 21, -1, 2, 19, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 's', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
+{ 1259, {"relrefs"}, 21, -1, 2, 20, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 's', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
+{ 1259, {"relhasoids"}, 16, -1, 1, 21, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 'c', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
+{ 1259, {"relhaspkey"}, 16, -1, 1, 22, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 'c', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
+{ 1259, {"relhasrules"}, 16, -1, 1, 23, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 'c', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
+{ 1259, {"relhassubclass"},16, -1, 1, 24, 0, -1, -1, true, 'p', 'c', true, false, false, true, 0 }, \
+{ 1259, {"relacl"}, 1034, -1, -1, 25, 1, -1, -1, false, 'x', 'i', false, false, false, true, 0 }
DATA(insert ( 1259 relname 19 -1 NAMEDATALEN 1 0 -1 -1 f p i t f f t 0));
DATA(insert ( 1259 relnamespace 26 -1 4 2 0 -1 -1 t p i t f f t 0));
DATA(insert ( 1259 relowner 23 -1 4 4 0 -1 -1 t p i t f f t 0));
DATA(insert ( 1259 relam 26 -1 4 5 0 -1 -1 t p i t f f t 0));
DATA(insert ( 1259 relfilenode 26 -1 4 6 0 -1 -1 t p i t f f t 0));
-DATA(insert ( 1259 relpages 23 -1 4 7 0 -1 -1 t p i t f f t 0));
-DATA(insert ( 1259 reltuples 700 -1 4 8 0 -1 -1 f p i t f f t 0));
-DATA(insert ( 1259 reltoastrelid 26 -1 4 9 0 -1 -1 t p i t f f t 0));
-DATA(insert ( 1259 reltoastidxid 26 -1 4 10 0 -1 -1 t p i t f f t 0));
-DATA(insert ( 1259 relhasindex 16 -1 1 11 0 -1 -1 t p c t f f t 0));
-DATA(insert ( 1259 relisshared 16 -1 1 12 0 -1 -1 t p c t f f t 0));
-DATA(insert ( 1259 relkind 18 -1 1 13 0 -1 -1 t p c t f f t 0));
-DATA(insert ( 1259 relnatts 21 -1 2 14 0 -1 -1 t p s t f f t 0));
-DATA(insert ( 1259 relchecks 21 -1 2 15 0 -1 -1 t p s t f f t 0));
-DATA(insert ( 1259 reltriggers 21 -1 2 16 0 -1 -1 t p s t f f t 0));
-DATA(insert ( 1259 relukeys 21 -1 2 17 0 -1 -1 t p s t f f t 0));
-DATA(insert ( 1259 relfkeys 21 -1 2 18 0 -1 -1 t p s t f f t 0));
-DATA(insert ( 1259 relrefs 21 -1 2 19 0 -1 -1 t p s t f f t 0));
-DATA(insert ( 1259 relhasoids 16 -1 1 20 0 -1 -1 t p c t f f t 0));
-DATA(insert ( 1259 relhaspkey 16 -1 1 21 0 -1 -1 t p c t f f t 0));
-DATA(insert ( 1259 relhasrules 16 -1 1 22 0 -1 -1 t p c t f f t 0));
-DATA(insert ( 1259 relhassubclass 16 -1 1 23 0 -1 -1 t p c t f f t 0));
-DATA(insert ( 1259 relacl 1034 -1 -1 24 1 -1 -1 f x i f f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1259 reltablespace 26 -1 4 7 0 -1 -1 t p i t f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1259 relpages 23 -1 4 8 0 -1 -1 t p i t f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1259 reltuples 700 -1 4 9 0 -1 -1 f p i t f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1259 reltoastrelid 26 -1 4 10 0 -1 -1 t p i t f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1259 reltoastidxid 26 -1 4 11 0 -1 -1 t p i t f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1259 relhasindex 16 -1 1 12 0 -1 -1 t p c t f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1259 relisshared 16 -1 1 13 0 -1 -1 t p c t f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1259 relkind 18 -1 1 14 0 -1 -1 t p c t f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1259 relnatts 21 -1 2 15 0 -1 -1 t p s t f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1259 relchecks 21 -1 2 16 0 -1 -1 t p s t f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1259 reltriggers 21 -1 2 17 0 -1 -1 t p s t f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1259 relukeys 21 -1 2 18 0 -1 -1 t p s t f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1259 relfkeys 21 -1 2 19 0 -1 -1 t p s t f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1259 relrefs 21 -1 2 20 0 -1 -1 t p s t f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1259 relhasoids 16 -1 1 21 0 -1 -1 t p c t f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1259 relhaspkey 16 -1 1 22 0 -1 -1 t p c t f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1259 relhasrules 16 -1 1 23 0 -1 -1 t p c t f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1259 relhassubclass 16 -1 1 24 0 -1 -1 t p c t f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1259 relacl 1034 -1 -1 25 1 -1 -1 f x i f f f t 0));
DATA(insert ( 1259 ctid 27 0 6 -1 0 -1 -1 f p s t f f t 0));
DATA(insert ( 1259 oid 26 0 4 -2 0 -1 -1 t p i t f f t 0));
DATA(insert ( 1259 xmin 28 0 4 -3 0 -1 -1 t p i t f f t 0));
DATA(insert ( 1259 cmax 29 0 4 -6 0 -1 -1 t p i t f f t 0));
DATA(insert ( 1259 tableoid 26 0 4 -7 0 -1 -1 t p i t f f t 0));
+/* ----------------
+ * pg_tablespace
+ * ----------------
+ */
+
+DATA(insert ( 1213 spcname 19 -1 NAMEDATALEN 1 0 -1 -1 f p i t f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1213 spcowner 23 -1 4 2 0 -1 -1 t p i t f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1213 spclocation 25 -1 -1 3 0 -1 -1 f x i t f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1213 spcacl 1034 -1 -1 4 1 -1 -1 f x i f f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1213 ctid 27 0 6 -1 0 -1 -1 f p s t f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1213 oid 26 0 4 -2 0 -1 -1 t p i t f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1213 xmin 28 0 4 -3 0 -1 -1 t p i t f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1213 cmin 29 0 4 -4 0 -1 -1 t p i t f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1213 xmax 28 0 4 -5 0 -1 -1 t p i t f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1213 cmax 29 0 4 -6 0 -1 -1 t p i t f f t 0));
+DATA(insert ( 1213 tableoid 26 0 4 -7 0 -1 -1 t p i t f f t 0));
+
/* ----------------
* pg_xactlock - this is not a real relation, but is a placeholder
* to allow a relation OID to be used for transaction
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2003, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/pg_class.h,v 1.81 2004/04/01 21:28:45 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/pg_class.h,v 1.82 2004/06/18 06:14:06 tgl Exp $
*
* NOTES
* the genbki.sh script reads this file and generates .bki
int4 relowner; /* class owner */
Oid relam; /* index access method; 0 if not an index */
Oid relfilenode; /* identifier of physical storage file */
+ Oid reltablespace; /* identifier of table space for relation */
int4 relpages; /* # of blocks (not always up-to-date) */
float4 reltuples; /* # of tuples (not always up-to-date) */
Oid reltoastrelid; /* OID of toast table; 0 if none */
* relacl field. This is a kluge.
* ----------------
*/
-#define Natts_pg_class_fixed 23
-#define Natts_pg_class 24
+#define Natts_pg_class_fixed 24
+#define Natts_pg_class 25
#define Anum_pg_class_relname 1
#define Anum_pg_class_relnamespace 2
#define Anum_pg_class_reltype 3
#define Anum_pg_class_relowner 4
#define Anum_pg_class_relam 5
#define Anum_pg_class_relfilenode 6
-#define Anum_pg_class_relpages 7
-#define Anum_pg_class_reltuples 8
-#define Anum_pg_class_reltoastrelid 9
-#define Anum_pg_class_reltoastidxid 10
-#define Anum_pg_class_relhasindex 11
-#define Anum_pg_class_relisshared 12
-#define Anum_pg_class_relkind 13
-#define Anum_pg_class_relnatts 14
-#define Anum_pg_class_relchecks 15
-#define Anum_pg_class_reltriggers 16
-#define Anum_pg_class_relukeys 17
-#define Anum_pg_class_relfkeys 18
-#define Anum_pg_class_relrefs 19
-#define Anum_pg_class_relhasoids 20
-#define Anum_pg_class_relhaspkey 21
-#define Anum_pg_class_relhasrules 22
-#define Anum_pg_class_relhassubclass 23
-#define Anum_pg_class_relacl 24
+#define Anum_pg_class_reltablespace 7
+#define Anum_pg_class_relpages 8
+#define Anum_pg_class_reltuples 9
+#define Anum_pg_class_reltoastrelid 10
+#define Anum_pg_class_reltoastidxid 11
+#define Anum_pg_class_relhasindex 12
+#define Anum_pg_class_relisshared 13
+#define Anum_pg_class_relkind 14
+#define Anum_pg_class_relnatts 15
+#define Anum_pg_class_relchecks 16
+#define Anum_pg_class_reltriggers 17
+#define Anum_pg_class_relukeys 18
+#define Anum_pg_class_relfkeys 19
+#define Anum_pg_class_relrefs 20
+#define Anum_pg_class_relhasoids 21
+#define Anum_pg_class_relhaspkey 22
+#define Anum_pg_class_relhasrules 23
+#define Anum_pg_class_relhassubclass 24
+#define Anum_pg_class_relacl 25
/* ----------------
* initial contents of pg_class
* ----------------
*/
-DATA(insert OID = 1247 ( pg_type PGNSP 71 PGUID 0 1247 0 0 0 0 f f r 23 0 0 0 0 0 t f f f _null_ ));
+DATA(insert OID = 1247 ( pg_type PGNSP 71 PGUID 0 1247 0 0 0 0 0 f f r 23 0 0 0 0 0 t f f f _null_ ));
DESCR("");
-DATA(insert OID = 1249 ( pg_attribute PGNSP 75 PGUID 0 1249 0 0 0 0 f f r 17 0 0 0 0 0 f f f f _null_ ));
+DATA(insert OID = 1249 ( pg_attribute PGNSP 75 PGUID 0 1249 0 0 0 0 0 f f r 17 0 0 0 0 0 f f f f _null_ ));
DESCR("");
-DATA(insert OID = 1255 ( pg_proc PGNSP 81 PGUID 0 1255 0 0 0 0 f f r 16 0 0 0 0 0 t f f f _null_ ));
+DATA(insert OID = 1255 ( pg_proc PGNSP 81 PGUID 0 1255 0 0 0 0 0 f f r 16 0 0 0 0 0 t f f f _null_ ));
DESCR("");
-DATA(insert OID = 1259 ( pg_class PGNSP 83 PGUID 0 1259 0 0 0 0 f f r 24 0 0 0 0 0 t f f f _null_ ));
+DATA(insert OID = 1259 ( pg_class PGNSP 83 PGUID 0 1259 0 0 0 0 0 f f r 25 0 0 0 0 0 t f f f _null_ ));
DESCR("");
-DATA(insert OID = 1260 ( pg_shadow PGNSP 86 PGUID 0 1260 0 0 0 0 f t r 8 0 0 0 0 0 f f f f _null_ ));
+DATA(insert OID = 1260 ( pg_shadow PGNSP 86 PGUID 0 1260 1664 0 0 0 0 f t r 8 0 0 0 0 0 f f f f _null_ ));
DESCR("");
-DATA(insert OID = 1261 ( pg_group PGNSP 87 PGUID 0 1261 0 0 0 0 f t r 3 0 0 0 0 0 f f f f _null_ ));
+DATA(insert OID = 1261 ( pg_group PGNSP 87 PGUID 0 1261 1664 0 0 0 0 f t r 3 0 0 0 0 0 f f f f _null_ ));
DESCR("");
-DATA(insert OID = 1262 ( pg_database PGNSP 88 PGUID 0 1262 0 0 0 0 f t r 11 0 0 0 0 0 t f f f _null_ ));
+DATA(insert OID = 1262 ( pg_database PGNSP 88 PGUID 0 1262 1664 0 0 0 0 f t r 11 0 0 0 0 0 t f f f _null_ ));
DESCR("");
-DATA(insert OID = 376 ( pg_xactlock PGNSP 0 PGUID 0 0 0 0 0 0 f t s 1 0 0 0 0 0 f f f f _null_ ));
+DATA(insert OID = 1213 ( pg_tablespace PGNSP 90 PGUID 0 1213 1664 0 0 0 0 f t r 4 0 0 0 0 0 t f f f _null_ ));
+DESCR("");
+DATA(insert OID = 376 ( pg_xactlock PGNSP 0 PGUID 0 0 1664 0 0 0 0 f t s 1 0 0 0 0 0 f f f f _null_ ));
DESCR("");
#define RelOid_pg_type 1247
#define RelOid_pg_shadow 1260
#define RelOid_pg_group 1261
#define RelOid_pg_database 1262
+#define RelOid_pg_tablespace 1213
/* Xact lock pseudo-table */
#define XactLockTableId 376
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2003, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/pg_database.h,v 1.31 2004/02/10 01:55:26 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/pg_database.h,v 1.32 2004/06/18 06:14:06 tgl Exp $
*
* NOTES
* the genbki.sh script reads this file and generates .bki
Oid datlastsysoid; /* highest OID to consider a system OID */
TransactionId datvacuumxid; /* all XIDs before this are vacuumed */
TransactionId datfrozenxid; /* all XIDs before this are frozen */
- text datpath; /* default database location (VAR LENGTH) */
+ Oid dattablespace; /* default table space for this DB */
text datconfig[1]; /* database-specific GUC (VAR LENGTH) */
aclitem datacl[1]; /* access permissions (VAR LENGTH) */
} FormData_pg_database;
#define Anum_pg_database_datlastsysoid 6
#define Anum_pg_database_datvacuumxid 7
#define Anum_pg_database_datfrozenxid 8
-#define Anum_pg_database_datpath 9
+#define Anum_pg_database_dattablespace 9
#define Anum_pg_database_datconfig 10
#define Anum_pg_database_datacl 11
-DATA(insert OID = 1 ( template1 PGUID ENCODING t t 0 0 0 "" _null_ _null_ ));
+DATA(insert OID = 1 ( template1 PGUID ENCODING t t 0 0 0 1663 _null_ _null_ ));
DESCR("Default template database");
#define TemplateDbOid 1
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2003, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/pg_namespace.h,v 1.11 2003/11/29 22:40:58 pgsql Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/pg_namespace.h,v 1.12 2004/06/18 06:14:06 tgl Exp $
*
* NOTES
* the genbki.sh script reads this file and generates .bki
{
NameData nspname;
int4 nspowner;
+ Oid nsptablespace; /* default table space for name space */
aclitem nspacl[1]; /* VARIABLE LENGTH FIELD */
} FormData_pg_namespace;
* ----------------
*/
-#define Natts_pg_namespace 3
+#define Natts_pg_namespace 4
#define Anum_pg_namespace_nspname 1
#define Anum_pg_namespace_nspowner 2
-#define Anum_pg_namespace_nspacl 3
+#define Anum_pg_namespace_nsptablespace 3
+#define Anum_pg_namespace_nspacl 4
/* ----------------
* ---------------
*/
-DATA(insert OID = 11 ( "pg_catalog" PGUID _null_ ));
+DATA(insert OID = 11 ( "pg_catalog" PGUID 0 _null_ ));
DESCR("System catalog schema");
#define PG_CATALOG_NAMESPACE 11
-DATA(insert OID = 99 ( "pg_toast" PGUID _null_ ));
+DATA(insert OID = 99 ( "pg_toast" PGUID 0 _null_ ));
DESCR("Reserved schema for TOAST tables");
#define PG_TOAST_NAMESPACE 99
-DATA(insert OID = 2200 ( "public" PGUID _null_ ));
+DATA(insert OID = 2200 ( "public" PGUID 0 _null_ ));
DESCR("Standard public schema");
#define PG_PUBLIC_NAMESPACE 2200
/*
* prototypes for functions in pg_namespace.c
*/
-extern Oid NamespaceCreate(const char *nspName, int32 ownerSysId);
+extern Oid NamespaceCreate(const char *nspName, int32 ownerSysId,
+ Oid nspTablespace);
#endif /* PG_NAMESPACE_H */
--- /dev/null
+/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * pg_tablespace.h
+ * definition of the system "tablespace" relation (pg_tablespace)
+ * along with the relation's initial contents.
+ *
+ *
+ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2003, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
+ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
+ *
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/pg_tablespace.h,v 1.1 2004/06/18 06:14:06 tgl Exp $
+ *
+ * NOTES
+ * the genbki.sh script reads this file and generates .bki
+ * information from the DATA() statements.
+ *
+ *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+#ifndef PG_TABLESPACE_H
+#define PG_TABLESPACE_H
+
+/* ----------------
+ * postgres.h contains the system type definitions and the
+ * CATALOG(), BOOTSTRAP and DATA() sugar words so this file
+ * can be read by both genbki.sh and the C compiler.
+ * ----------------
+ */
+
+/* ----------------
+ * pg_tablespace definition. cpp turns this into
+ * typedef struct FormData_pg_tablespace
+ * ----------------
+ */
+CATALOG(pg_tablespace) BOOTSTRAP BKI_SHARED_RELATION
+{
+ NameData spcname; /* tablespace name */
+ int4 spcowner; /* sysid of owner */
+ text spclocation; /* physical location (VAR LENGTH) */
+ aclitem spcacl[1]; /* access permissions (VAR LENGTH) */
+} FormData_pg_tablespace;
+
+/* ----------------
+ * Form_pg_tablespace corresponds to a pointer to a tuple with
+ * the format of pg_tablespace relation.
+ * ----------------
+ */
+typedef FormData_pg_tablespace *Form_pg_tablespace;
+
+/* ----------------
+ * compiler constants for pg_tablespace
+ * ----------------
+ */
+
+#define Natts_pg_tablespace 4
+#define Anum_pg_tablespace_spcname 1
+#define Anum_pg_tablespace_spcowner 2
+#define Anum_pg_tablespace_spclocation 3
+#define Anum_pg_tablespace_spcacl 4
+
+DATA(insert OID = 1663 ( default PGUID "" _null_ ));
+DATA(insert OID = 1664 ( global PGUID "" _null_ ));
+
+#define DEFAULTTABLESPACE_OID 1663
+#define GLOBALTABLESPACE_OID 1664
+
+#endif /* PG_TABLESPACE_H */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2003, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/pg_type.h,v 1.153 2004/06/06 19:07:01 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/pg_type.h,v 1.154 2004/06/18 06:14:06 tgl Exp $
*
* NOTES
* the genbki.sh script reads this file and generates .bki
DESCR("array of INDEX_MAX_KEYS oids, used in system tables");
#define OIDVECTOROID 30
-DATA(insert OID = 71 ( pg_type PGNSP PGUID -1 f c t \054 1247 0 record_in record_out record_recv record_send - d x f 0 -1 0 _null_ _null_ ));
-DATA(insert OID = 75 ( pg_attribute PGNSP PGUID -1 f c t \054 1249 0 record_in record_out record_recv record_send - d x f 0 -1 0 _null_ _null_ ));
-DATA(insert OID = 81 ( pg_proc PGNSP PGUID -1 f c t \054 1255 0 record_in record_out record_recv record_send - d x f 0 -1 0 _null_ _null_ ));
-DATA(insert OID = 83 ( pg_class PGNSP PGUID -1 f c t \054 1259 0 record_in record_out record_recv record_send - d x f 0 -1 0 _null_ _null_ ));
-DATA(insert OID = 86 ( pg_shadow PGNSP PGUID -1 f c t \054 1260 0 record_in record_out record_recv record_send - d x f 0 -1 0 _null_ _null_ ));
-DATA(insert OID = 87 ( pg_group PGNSP PGUID -1 f c t \054 1261 0 record_in record_out record_recv record_send - d x f 0 -1 0 _null_ _null_ ));
-DATA(insert OID = 88 ( pg_database PGNSP PGUID -1 f c t \054 1262 0 record_in record_out record_recv record_send - d x f 0 -1 0 _null_ _null_ ));
+DATA(insert OID = 71 ( pg_type PGNSP PGUID -1 f c t \054 1247 0 record_in record_out record_recv record_send - d x f 0 -1 0 _null_ _null_ ));
+DATA(insert OID = 75 ( pg_attribute PGNSP PGUID -1 f c t \054 1249 0 record_in record_out record_recv record_send - d x f 0 -1 0 _null_ _null_ ));
+DATA(insert OID = 81 ( pg_proc PGNSP PGUID -1 f c t \054 1255 0 record_in record_out record_recv record_send - d x f 0 -1 0 _null_ _null_ ));
+DATA(insert OID = 83 ( pg_class PGNSP PGUID -1 f c t \054 1259 0 record_in record_out record_recv record_send - d x f 0 -1 0 _null_ _null_ ));
+DATA(insert OID = 86 ( pg_shadow PGNSP PGUID -1 f c t \054 1260 0 record_in record_out record_recv record_send - d x f 0 -1 0 _null_ _null_ ));
+DATA(insert OID = 87 ( pg_group PGNSP PGUID -1 f c t \054 1261 0 record_in record_out record_recv record_send - d x f 0 -1 0 _null_ _null_ ));
+DATA(insert OID = 88 ( pg_database PGNSP PGUID -1 f c t \054 1262 0 record_in record_out record_recv record_send - d x f 0 -1 0 _null_ _null_ ));
+DATA(insert OID = 90 ( pg_tablespace PGNSP PGUID -1 f c t \054 1213 0 record_in record_out record_recv record_send - d x f 0 -1 0 _null_ _null_ ));
/* OIDS 100 - 199 */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2003, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/commands/defrem.h,v 1.57 2004/06/10 17:55:59 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/commands/defrem.h,v 1.58 2004/06/18 06:14:08 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern void DefineIndex(RangeVar *heapRelation,
char *indexRelationName,
char *accessMethodName,
+ char *tableSpaceName,
List *attributeList,
Expr *predicate,
List *rangetable,
--- /dev/null
+/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * tablespace.h
+ * prototypes for tablespace.c.
+ *
+ *
+ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2004, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
+ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
+ *
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/commands/tablespace.h,v 1.1 2004/06/18 06:14:08 tgl Exp $
+ *
+ *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+#ifndef TABLESPACE_H
+#define TABLESPACE_H
+
+#include "nodes/parsenodes.h"
+
+extern void CreateTableSpace(CreateTableSpaceStmt *stmt);
+
+extern void DropTableSpace(DropTableSpaceStmt *stmt);
+
+extern void TablespaceCreateDbspace(Oid spcNode, Oid dbNode);
+
+extern Oid get_tablespace_oid(const char *tablespacename);
+
+extern char *get_tablespace_name(Oid spc_oid);
+
+#endif /* TABLESPACE_H */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2003, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/miscadmin.h,v 1.162 2004/05/29 22:48:22 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/miscadmin.h,v 1.163 2004/06/18 06:14:10 tgl Exp $
*
* NOTES
* some of the information in this file should be moved to other files.
*/
extern DLLIMPORT Oid MyDatabaseId;
+extern DLLIMPORT Oid MyDatabaseTableSpace;
+
/*
* Date/Time Configuration
*
extern char *DatabasePath;
/* in utils/misc/database.c */
-extern void GetRawDatabaseInfo(const char *name, Oid *db_id, char *path);
+extern void GetRawDatabaseInfo(const char *name, Oid *db_id, Oid *db_tablespace);
/* now in utils/init/miscinit.c */
extern void SetDatabasePath(const char *path);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2003, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/nodes/nodes.h,v 1.157 2004/06/09 19:08:18 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/nodes/nodes.h,v 1.158 2004/06/18 06:14:11 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
T_ExecuteStmt,
T_DeallocateStmt,
T_DeclareCursorStmt,
+ T_CreateTableSpaceStmt,
+ T_DropTableSpaceStmt,
T_AlterDbOwnerStmt,
T_A_Expr = 800,
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2003, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/nodes/parsenodes.h,v 1.258 2004/06/09 19:08:18 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/nodes/parsenodes.h,v 1.259 2004/06/18 06:14:11 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
OBJECT_SCHEMA,
OBJECT_SEQUENCE,
OBJECT_TABLE,
+ OBJECT_TABLESPACE,
OBJECT_TRIGGER,
OBJECT_TYPE,
OBJECT_USER,
NodeTag type;
char *schemaname; /* the name of the schema to create */
char *authid; /* the owner of the created schema */
+ char *tablespacename; /* default tablespace for schema, or NULL */
List *schemaElts; /* schema components (list of parsenodes) */
} CreateSchemaStmt;
ACL_OBJECT_DATABASE, /* database */
ACL_OBJECT_FUNCTION, /* function */
ACL_OBJECT_LANGUAGE, /* procedural language */
- ACL_OBJECT_NAMESPACE /* namespace */
+ ACL_OBJECT_NAMESPACE, /* namespace */
+ ACL_OBJECT_TABLESPACE /* tablespace */
} GrantObjectType;
typedef struct GrantStmt
List *constraints; /* constraints (list of Constraint nodes) */
ContainsOids hasoids; /* should it have OIDs? */
OnCommitAction oncommit; /* what do we do at COMMIT? */
+ char *tablespacename; /* table space to use, or NULL */
} CreateStmt;
/* ----------
bool skip_validation; /* skip validation of existing rows? */
} FkConstraint;
+
+/* ----------------------
+ * Create/Drop Table Space Statements
+ * ----------------------
+ */
+
+typedef struct CreateTableSpaceStmt
+{
+ NodeTag type;
+ char *tablespacename;
+ char *owner;
+ char *location;
+} CreateTableSpaceStmt;
+
+typedef struct DropTableSpaceStmt
+{
+ NodeTag type;
+ char *tablespacename;
+} DropTableSpaceStmt;
+
/* ----------------------
* Create/Drop TRIGGER Statements
* ----------------------
NodeTag type;
RangeVar *sequence; /* the sequence to create */
List *options;
+ char *tablespacename; /* tablespace, or NULL for default */
} CreateSeqStmt;
typedef struct AlterSeqStmt
char *idxname; /* name of new index, or NULL for default */
RangeVar *relation; /* relation to build index on */
char *accessMethod; /* name of access method (eg. btree) */
+ char *tableSpace; /* tablespace, or NULL to use parent's */
List *indexParams; /* a list of IndexElem */
Node *whereClause; /* qualification (partial-index predicate) */
List *rangetable; /* range table for qual and/or
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2003, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/storage/buf_internals.h,v 1.70 2004/04/21 18:06:29 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/storage/buf_internals.h,v 1.71 2004/06/18 06:14:13 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#define CLEAR_BUFFERTAG(a) \
( \
- (a).rnode.tblNode = InvalidOid, \
+ (a).rnode.spcNode = InvalidOid, \
+ (a).rnode.dbNode = InvalidOid, \
(a).rnode.relNode = InvalidOid, \
(a).blockNum = InvalidBlockNumber \
)
+/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * relfilenode.h
+ * Physical access information for relations.
+ *
+ *
+ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2003, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
+ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
+ *
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/storage/relfilenode.h,v 1.9 2004/06/18 06:14:13 tgl Exp $
+ *
+ *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
#ifndef RELFILENODE_H
#define RELFILENODE_H
/*
- * This is all what we need to know to find relation file.
- * tblNode is identificator of tablespace and because of
- * currently our tablespaces are equal to databases this is
- * database OID. relNode is currently relation OID on creation
- * but may be changed later if required. relNode is stored in
- * pg_class.relfilenode.
+ * RelFileNode must provide all that we need to know to physically access
+ * a relation.
+ *
+ * spcNode identifies the tablespace of the relation. It corresponds to
+ * pg_tablespace.oid.
+ *
+ * dbNode identifies the database of the relation. It is zero for
+ * "shared" relations (those common to all databases of a cluster).
+ * Nonzero dbNode values correspond to pg_database.oid.
+ *
+ * relNode identifies the specific relation. relNode corresponds to
+ * pg_class.relfilenode (NOT pg_class.oid, because we need to be able
+ * to assign new physical files to relations in some situations).
+ * Notice that relNode is only unique within a particular database.
+ *
+ * Note: spcNode must be GLOBALTABLESPACE_OID if and only if dbNode is
+ * zero. We support shared relations only in the "global" tablespace.
+ *
+ * Note: in pg_class we allow reltablespace == 0 to denote that the
+ * relation is stored in its database's "default" tablespace (as
+ * identified by pg_database.dattablespace). However this shorthand
+ * is NOT allowed in RelFileNode structs --- the real tablespace ID
+ * must be supplied when setting spcNode.
*/
typedef struct RelFileNode
{
- Oid tblNode; /* tablespace */
+ Oid spcNode; /* tablespace */
+ Oid dbNode; /* database */
Oid relNode; /* relation */
} RelFileNode;
+/*
+ * Note: RelFileNodeEquals compares relNode first since that is most likely
+ * to be different in two unequal RelFileNodes. It is probably redundant
+ * to compare spcNode if the other two fields are found equal, but do it
+ * anyway to be sure.
+ */
#define RelFileNodeEquals(node1, node2) \
((node1).relNode == (node2).relNode && \
- (node1).tblNode == (node2).tblNode)
+ (node1).dbNode == (node2).dbNode && \
+ (node1).spcNode == (node2).spcNode)
-#endif /* RELFILENODE_H */
+#endif /* RELFILENODE_H */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2003, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/acl.h,v 1.70 2004/06/01 21:49:22 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/acl.h,v 1.71 2004/06/18 06:14:21 tgl Exp $
*
* NOTES
* An ACL array is simply an array of AclItems, representing the union
#define ACL_ALL_RIGHTS_FUNCTION (ACL_EXECUTE)
#define ACL_ALL_RIGHTS_LANGUAGE (ACL_USAGE)
#define ACL_ALL_RIGHTS_NAMESPACE (ACL_USAGE|ACL_CREATE)
+#define ACL_ALL_RIGHTS_TABLESPACE (ACL_CREATE)
/* operation codes for pg_*_aclmask */
typedef enum
ACL_KIND_NAMESPACE, /* pg_namespace */
ACL_KIND_OPCLASS, /* pg_opclass */
ACL_KIND_CONVERSION, /* pg_conversion */
+ ACL_KIND_TABLESPACE, /* pg_tablespace */
MAX_ACL_KIND /* MUST BE LAST */
} AclObjectKind;
AclMode mask, AclMaskHow how);
extern AclMode pg_namespace_aclmask(Oid nsp_oid, AclId userid,
AclMode mask, AclMaskHow how);
+extern AclMode pg_tablespace_aclmask(Oid spc_oid, AclId userid,
+ AclMode mask, AclMaskHow how);
extern AclResult pg_class_aclcheck(Oid table_oid, AclId userid, AclMode mode);
extern AclResult pg_database_aclcheck(Oid db_oid, AclId userid, AclMode mode);
extern AclResult pg_proc_aclcheck(Oid proc_oid, AclId userid, AclMode mode);
extern AclResult pg_language_aclcheck(Oid lang_oid, AclId userid, AclMode mode);
extern AclResult pg_namespace_aclcheck(Oid nsp_oid, AclId userid, AclMode mode);
+extern AclResult pg_tablespace_aclcheck(Oid spc_oid, AclId userid, AclMode mode);
extern void aclcheck_error(AclResult aclerr, AclObjectKind objectkind,
const char *objectname);
extern bool pg_oper_ownercheck(Oid oper_oid, AclId userid);
extern bool pg_proc_ownercheck(Oid proc_oid, AclId userid);
extern bool pg_namespace_ownercheck(Oid nsp_oid, AclId userid);
+extern bool pg_tablespace_ownercheck(Oid spc_oid, AclId userid);
extern bool pg_opclass_ownercheck(Oid opc_oid, AclId userid);
extern bool pg_database_ownercheck(Oid db_oid, AclId userid);
extern bool pg_conversion_ownercheck(Oid conv_oid, AclId userid);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2003, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/lsyscache.h,v 1.87 2004/06/06 00:41:28 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/lsyscache.h,v 1.88 2004/06/18 06:14:21 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern Oid get_system_catalog_relid(const char *catname);
extern char *get_rel_name(Oid relid);
extern Oid get_rel_namespace(Oid relid);
+extern Oid get_rel_tablespace(Oid relid);
extern Oid get_rel_type_id(Oid relid);
extern char get_rel_relkind(Oid relid);
extern bool get_typisdefined(Oid typid);
Datum *values, int nvalues,
float4 *numbers, int nnumbers);
extern char *get_namespace_name(Oid nspid);
+extern Oid get_namespace_tablespace(Oid nspid);
extern int32 get_usesysid(const char *username);
#define is_array_type(typid) (get_element_type(typid) != InvalidOid)
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2003, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/relcache.h,v 1.39 2004/02/10 01:55:27 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/relcache.h,v 1.40 2004/06/18 06:14:21 tgl Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern Relation RelationBuildLocalRelation(const char *relname,
Oid relnamespace,
TupleDesc tupDesc,
- Oid relid, Oid dbid,
- RelFileNode rnode,
+ Oid relid,
+ Oid reltablespace,
+ bool shared_relation,
bool nailit);
/*
#
#
# IDENTIFICATION
-# $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/test/regress/GNUmakefile,v 1.46 2004/03/03 04:22:47 momjian Exp $
+# $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/test/regress/GNUmakefile,v 1.47 2004/06/18 06:14:25 tgl Exp $
#
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Build test input and expected files
-file_list := copy create_function_1 create_function_2 misc constraints
+file_list := copy create_function_1 create_function_2 misc constraints tablespace
input_files := $(foreach file, $(file_list), sql/$(file).sql)
output_files := $(foreach file, $(file_list), expected/$(file).out)
abs_builddir := $(shell pwd -W)
endif
+testtablespace := $(abs_builddir)/testtablespace
+
define sed-command
sed -e 's,@abs_srcdir@,$(abs_srcdir),g' \
-e 's,@abs_builddir@,$(abs_builddir),g' \
+ -e 's,@testtablespace@,$(testtablespace),g' \
-e 's/@DLSUFFIX@/$(DLSUFFIX)/g' $< >$@
endef
##
check: all
+ -rm -rf ./testtablespace
+ mkdir ./testtablespace
$(SHELL) ./pg_regress --temp-install --top-builddir=$(top_builddir) --schedule=$(srcdir)/parallel_schedule --multibyte=$(MULTIBYTE) $(MAXCONNOPT)
installcheck: all
+ -rm -rf ./testtablespace
+ mkdir ./testtablespace
$(SHELL) ./pg_regress --schedule=$(srcdir)/serial_schedule --multibyte=$(MULTIBYTE)
$(MAKE) -C $(contribdir)/spi clean
rm -f $(output_files) $(input_files) $(DLOBJS) regress.o pg_regress
# things created by various check targets
+ rm -rf testtablespace
rm -rf results tmp_check log
rm -f regression.diffs regression.out regress.out run_check.out
ifeq ($(PORTNAME), cygwin)
pg_rewrite | t
pg_shadow | t
pg_statistic | t
+ pg_tablespace | t
pg_trigger | t
pg_type | t
road | t
shighway | t
tenk1 | t
tenk2 | t
-(52 rows)
+(53 rows)
--
-- another sanity check: every system catalog that has OIDs should have
--- /dev/null
+-- create a tablespace we can use
+CREATE TABLESPACE testspace LOCATION '@testtablespace@';
+
+-- create a schema in the tablespace
+CREATE SCHEMA testschema TABLESPACE testspace;
+
+-- sanity check
+SELECT nspname, spcname FROM pg_catalog.pg_tablespace t, pg_catalog.pg_namespace n
+ where n.nsptablespace = t.oid and n.nspname = 'testschema';
+
+-- try a table
+CREATE TABLE testschema.foo (i int);
+SELECT relname, spcname FROM pg_catalog.pg_tablespace t, pg_catalog.pg_class c
+ where c.reltablespace = t.oid AND c.relname = 'foo';
+
+INSERT INTO testschema.foo VALUES(1);
+INSERT INTO testschema.foo VALUES(2);
+
+-- index
+CREATE INDEX foo_idx on testschema.foo(i);
+SELECT relname, spcname FROM pg_catalog.pg_tablespace t, pg_catalog.pg_class c
+ where c.reltablespace = t.oid AND c.relname = 'foo_idx';
+
+-- Will fail with bad path
+CREATE TABLESPACE badspace LOCATION '/no/such/location';
+
+-- No such tablespace
+CREATE TABLE bar (i int) TABLESPACE nosuchspace;
+
+-- Fail, not empty
+DROP TABLESPACE testspace;
+
+DROP SCHEMA testschema CASCADE;
+
+-- Should succeed
+DROP TABLESPACE testspace;
--- /dev/null
+-- create a tablespace we can use
+CREATE TABLESPACE testspace LOCATION '@testtablespace@';
+-- create a schema in the tablespace
+CREATE SCHEMA testschema TABLESPACE testspace;
+-- sanity check
+SELECT nspname, spcname FROM pg_catalog.pg_tablespace t, pg_catalog.pg_namespace n
+ where n.nsptablespace = t.oid and n.nspname = 'testschema';
+ nspname | spcname
+------------+-----------
+ testschema | testspace
+(1 row)
+
+-- try a table
+CREATE TABLE testschema.foo (i int);
+SELECT relname, spcname FROM pg_catalog.pg_tablespace t, pg_catalog.pg_class c
+ where c.reltablespace = t.oid AND c.relname = 'foo';
+ relname | spcname
+---------+-----------
+ foo | testspace
+(1 row)
+
+INSERT INTO testschema.foo VALUES(1);
+INSERT INTO testschema.foo VALUES(2);
+-- index
+CREATE INDEX foo_idx on testschema.foo(i);
+SELECT relname, spcname FROM pg_catalog.pg_tablespace t, pg_catalog.pg_class c
+ where c.reltablespace = t.oid AND c.relname = 'foo_idx';
+ relname | spcname
+---------+-----------
+ foo_idx | testspace
+(1 row)
+
+-- Will fail with bad path
+CREATE TABLESPACE badspace LOCATION '/no/such/location';
+ERROR: could not set permissions on directory "/no/such/location": No such file or directory
+-- No such tablespace
+CREATE TABLE bar (i int) TABLESPACE nosuchspace;
+ERROR: tablespace "nosuchspace" does not exist
+-- Fail, not empty
+DROP TABLESPACE testspace;
+ERROR: tablespace "testspace" is not empty
+DROP SCHEMA testschema CASCADE;
+NOTICE: drop cascades to table testschema.foo
+-- Should succeed
+DROP TABLESPACE testspace;
# Depends on point, lseg, box, path, polygon and circle
test: geometry
# Depends on interval, timetz, timestamp, timestamptz, reltime and abstime
-test: horology
+test: horology
# ----------
# These four each depend on the previous one
# run stats by itself because its delay may be insufficient under heavy load
test: stats
+
+# run tablespace by itself
+test: tablespace
-# $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/test/regress/serial_schedule,v 1.25 2004/06/06 21:20:46 tgl Exp $
+# $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/test/regress/serial_schedule,v 1.26 2004/06/18 06:14:25 tgl Exp $
# This should probably be in an order similar to parallel_schedule.
test: boolean
test: char
test: polymorphism
test: rowtypes
test: stats
+test: tablespace
projects / postgresql / commitdiff